Relion 615 series

Line Differential Protection and Control

RED615
Application Manual
 Document ID: 1MRS756498
Issued: 2016-05-20
Revision: M
Product version: 5.0 FP1

Copyright 2016 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party,
nor used for any unauthorized purpose.

The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and
may be used, copied, or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.

Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or
product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.

Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.

http://www.abb.com/substationautomation
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or
product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties.
All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must
satisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including
that any applicable safety or other operational requirements are complied with. In
particular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/or product failure
would create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but not limited to
personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entity
applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure that
all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.

This product has been designed to be connected and communicate data and
information via a network interface which should be connected to a secure network.
It is the sole responsibility of the person or entity responsible for network
administration to ensure a secure connection to the network and to take the necessary
measures (such as, but not limited to, installation of firewalls, application of
authentication measures, encryption of data, installation of anti virus programs, etc.)
to protect the product and the network, its system and interface included, against any
kind of security breaches, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, leakage and/or
theft of data or information. ABB is not liable for any such damages and/or losses.

This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be
completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to
notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no
event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use
of this manual or the application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities
on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for
use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This
conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product
standard EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the product standards EN
60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The product is designed in
accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series.
 Table of contents

Table of contents

Section 1 Introduction.......................................................................5
This manual........................................................................................ 5
Intended audience.............................................................................. 5
Product documentation.......................................................................6
Product documentation set............................................................6
Document revision history............................................................. 6
Related documentation..................................................................7
Symbols and conventions...................................................................7
Symbols.........................................................................................7
Document conventions.................................................................. 8
Functions, codes and symbols...................................................... 9

Section 2 RED615 overview...........................................................15

Overview...........................................................................................15
Product version history................................................................ 16
PCM600 and relay connectivity package version........................17
Operation functionality......................................................................17
Optional functions........................................................................17
Physical hardware............................................................................ 18
Local HMI......................................................................................... 20
Display.........................................................................................21
LEDs............................................................................................22
Keypad........................................................................................ 22
Web HMI...........................................................................................22
Authorization.....................................................................................24
Audit trail......................................................................................24
Communication.................................................................................26
Self-healing Ethernet ring............................................................ 27
Ethernet redundancy................................................................... 28
Process bus.................................................................................30
Secure communication................................................................ 32
Protection communication and supervision................................. 32

Section 3 RED615 standard configurations................................... 35

Standard configurations....................................................................35
Addition of control functions for primary devices and the use
of binary inputs and outputs........................................................ 37
Connection diagrams........................................................................39
Standard configuration A.................................................................. 43
Applications................................................................................. 43

RED615 1
Application Manual
Table of contents

Functions..................................................................................... 44
Default I/O connections.......................................................... 44
Default disturbance recorder settings.....................................46
Functional diagrams.................................................................... 47
Functional diagrams for protection ........................................ 47
Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder........................51
Functional diagrams for condition monitoring.........................52
Functional diagrams for control and interlocking....................54
Functional diagrams for measurement functions................... 56
Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs......................... 57
Functional diagrams for other timer logics ............................ 60
Other functions ...................................................................... 61
Standard configuration B.................................................................. 61
Applications................................................................................. 61
Functions..................................................................................... 62
Default I/O connections.......................................................... 62
Default disturbance recorder settings.....................................64
Functional diagrams.................................................................... 66
Functional diagrams for protection......................................... 66
Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder........................76
Functional diagrams for condition monitoring.........................77
Functional diagrams for control and interlocking....................80
Functional diagrams for measurement functions................... 83
Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs......................... 84
Functional diagrams for other timer logics............................. 87
Other functions ...................................................................... 88
Standard configuration C..................................................................88
Applications................................................................................. 88
Functions..................................................................................... 89
Default I/O connections.......................................................... 89
Default disturbance recorder settings.....................................91
Functional diagrams.................................................................... 92
Functional diagrams for protection......................................... 93
Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder........................99
Functional diagrams for condition monitoring.......................100
Functional diagrams for control and interlocking..................103
Functional diagrams for measurement functions................. 106
Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs....................... 107
Functional diagrams for other timer logics........................... 110
Other functions .................................................................... 111
Standard configuration D................................................................111
Applications............................................................................... 111
Functions................................................................................... 112

2 RED615
Application Manual
 Table of contents

Default I/O connections........................................................ 113

Default disturbance recorder settings...................................114
Functional diagrams.................................................................. 116
Functional diagrams for protection ...................................... 117
Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder......................128
Functional diagrams for condition monitoring.......................129
Functional diagrams for control and interlocking..................132
Functional diagrams for measurement functions ................ 135
Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs....................... 137
Functional diagrams for other timer logics........................... 140
Other functions .................................................................... 141
Standard configuration E................................................................ 141
Applications............................................................................... 141
Functions................................................................................... 143
Default I/O connections........................................................ 143
Default disturbance recorder settings...................................145
Functional diagrams.................................................................. 147
Functional diagrams for protection....................................... 148
Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder......................158
Functional diagrams for condition monitoring.......................159
Functional diagrams for control and interlocking..................162
Functional diagrams for measurement functions................. 165
Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs ...................... 167
Other functions .................................................................... 170

Section 4 Requirements for measurement transformers..............171

Current transformers...................................................................... 171
Current transformer requirements for non-directional
overcurrent protection................................................................171
Current transformer accuracy class and accuracy limit
factor.................................................................................... 171
Non-directional overcurrent protection................................. 172
Example for non-directional overcurrent protection..............173

Section 5 IED physical connections............................................. 175

Inputs..............................................................................................175
Energizing inputs....................................................................... 175
Phase currents..................................................................... 175
Residual current................................................................... 175
Phase voltages.....................................................................175
Residual voltage...................................................................176
Sensor inputs....................................................................... 176
Auxiliary supply voltage input.................................................... 176
Binary inputs..............................................................................176

RED615 3
Application Manual
Table of contents

RTD/mA inputs.......................................................................... 178

Outputs........................................................................................... 179
Outputs for tripping and controlling............................................179
Outputs for signalling.................................................................179
IRF.............................................................................................181
Protection communication options..................................................181

Section 6 Glossary....................................................................... 183

4 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 1
Introduction

Section 1 Introduction

1.1 This manual

The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines

sorted per function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose a
typical protection function can be used. The manual can also be used when calculating
settings.

1.2 Intended audience

This manual addresses the protection and control engineer responsible for planning,
pre-engineering and engineering.

The protection and control engineer must be experienced in electrical power

engineering and have knowledge of related technology, such as protection schemes
and principles.

RED615 5
Application Manual
Section 1 1MRS756498 M
Introduction

1.3 Product documentation

1.3.1 Product documentation set

deinstallation & disposal

Decommissioning,
Commissioning

Maintenance
Engineering
Planning &

Installation

Operation
Quick start guide purchase
Quick installation guide
Brochure
Product guide
Operation manual
Installation manual
Connection diagram
Engineering manual
Technical manual
Application manual
Communication protocol manual
IEC 61850 engineering guide
Point list manual
Cyber security deployment guideline
GUID-12DC16B2-2DC1-48DF-8734-0C8B7116124C V2 EN

Figure 1: The intended use of documents during the product life cycle

Product series- and product-specific manuals can be downloaded

from the ABB Web site http://www.abb.com/relion.

1.3.2 Document revision history

Document revision/date Product version History
A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release
B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the
product version
C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content updated to correspond to the
product version
D/2010-06-29 3.0 Terminology updated
E/2010-09-24 3.0 Content updated
F/2012-05-11 4.0 Content updated to correspond to the
product version
G/2013-02-21 4.0 FP1 Content updated to correspond to the
product version
Table continues on next page

6 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 1
Introduction

Document revision/date Product version History

H/2013-12-20 5.0 Content updated to correspond to the
product version
K/2014-01-24 5.0 Content updated
L/2015-10-30 5.0 FP1 Content updated to correspond to the
product version
M/2016-05-20 5.0 FP1 Content updated

Download the latest documents from the ABB Web site

http://www.abb.com/substationautomation.

1.3.3 Related documentation

Name of the document Document ID
Modbus Communication Protocol Manual 1MRS756468
DNP3 Communication Protocol Manual 1MRS756709
IEC 60870-5-103 Communication Protocol Manual 1MRS756710
IEC 61850 Engineering Guide 1MRS756475
Engineering Manual 1MRS757121
Installation Manual 1MRS756375
Operation Manual 1MRS756708
Technical Manual 1MRS756887
Cyber Security Deployment Guideline 1MRS758280

1.4 Symbols and conventions

1.4.1 Symbols

The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which

could result in electrical shock.

The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could

result in personal injury.

The caution icon indicates important information or warning related

to the concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of

RED615 7
Application Manual
Section 1 1MRS756498 M
Introduction

a hazard which could result in corruption of software or damage to

equipment or property.

The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and

conditions.

The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your
project or how to use a certain function.

Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand

that under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result
in degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. Therefore,
comply fully with all warning and caution notices.

1.4.2 Document conventions

A particular convention may not be used in this manual.

Abbreviations and acronyms are spelled out in the glossary. The glossary also
contains definitions of important terms.
Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the
push button icons.
To navigate between the options, use and .
Menu paths are presented in bold.
Select Main menu/Settings.
LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
To save the changes in nonvolatile memory, select Yes and press .
Parameter names are shown in italics.
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
Parameter values are indicated with quotation marks.
The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".
Input/output messages and monitored data names are shown in Courier font.
When the function starts, the START output is set to TRUE.
This document assumes that the parameter setting visibility is "Advanced".

8 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 1
Introduction

1.4.3 Functions, codes and symbols

Table 1: Functions included in the relay
Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSI
Protection
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent PHLPTOC1 3I> (1) 51P-1 (1)
protection, low stage
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent PHHPTOC1 3I>> (1) 51P-2 (1)
protection, high stage
PHHPTOC2 3I>> (2) 51P-2 (2)
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent PHIPTOC1 3I>>> (1) 50P/51P (1)
protection, instantaneous stage
Three-phase directional overcurrent DPHLPDOC1 3I> -> (1) 67-1 (1)
protection, low stage
DPHLPDOC2 3I> -> (2) 67-1 (2)
Three-phase directional overcurrent DPHHPDOC1 3I>> -> (1) 67-2 (1)
protection, high stage
Non-directional earth-fault protection, low EFLPTOC1 Io> (1) 51N-1 (1)
stage
EFLPTOC2 Io> (2) 51N-1 (2)
Non-directional earth-fault protection, EFHPTOC1 Io>> (1) 51N-2 (1)
high stage
Non-directional earth-fault protection, EFIPTOC1 Io>>> (1) 50N/51N (1)
instantaneous stage
Directional earth-fault protection, low DEFLPDEF1 Io> -> (1) 67N-1 (1)
stage
DEFLPDEF2 Io> -> (2) 67N-1 (2)
Directional earth-fault protection, high DEFHPDEF1 Io>> -> (1) 67N-2 (1)
stage
Admittance-based earth-fault protection EFPADM1 Yo> -> (1) 21YN (1)
EFPADM2 Yo> -> (2) 21YN (2)
EFPADM3 Yo> -> (3) 21YN (3)
Wattmetric-based earth-fault protection WPWDE1 Po> -> (1) 32N (1)
WPWDE2 Po> -> (2) 32N (2)
WPWDE3 Po> -> (3) 32N (3)
Transient/intermittent earth-fault INTRPTEF1 Io> -> IEF (1) 67NIEF (1)
protection
Harmonics-based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC1 Io>HA (1) 51NHA (1)
Non-directional (cross-country) earth- EFHPTOC1 Io>> (1) 51N-2 (1)
fault protection, using calculated Io
Negative-sequence overcurrent NSPTOC1 I2> (1) 46 (1)
protection
NSPTOC2 I2> (2) 46 (2)
Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 I2/I1> (1) 46PD (1)
Residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV1 Uo> (1) 59G (1)
ROVPTOV2 Uo> (2) 59G (2)
ROVPTOV3 Uo> (3) 59G (3)
Table continues on next page

RED615 9
Application Manual
Section 1 1MRS756498 M
Introduction

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSI

Three-phase undervoltage protection PHPTUV1 3U< (1) 27 (1)
PHPTUV2 3U< (2) 27 (2)
PHPTUV3 3U< (3) 27 (3)
Three-phase overvoltage protection PHPTOV1 3U> (1) 59 (1)
PHPTOV2 3U> (2) 59 (2)
PHPTOV3 3U> (3) 59 (3)
Positive-sequence undervoltage PSPTUV1 U1< (1) 47U+ (1)
protection
Negative-sequence overvoltage NSPTOV1 U2> (1) 47O- (1)
protection
Frequency protection FRPFRQ1 f>/f<,df/dt (1) 81 (1)
FRPFRQ2 f>/f<,df/dt (2) 81 (2)
FRPFRQ3 f>/f<,df/dt (3) 81 (3)
FRPFRQ4 f>/f<,df/dt (4) 81 (4)
Three-phase thermal protection for T1PTTR1 3Ith>F (1) 49F (1)
feeders, cables and distribution
transformers
Three-phase thermal overload protection, T2PTTR1 3Ith>T/G/C (1) 49T/G/C (1)
two time constants
Binary signal transfer BSTGGIO1 BST (1) BST (1)
Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 3I>/Io>BF (1) 51BF/51NBF (1)
Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 3I2f> (1) 68 (1)
Switch onto fault CBPSOF1 SOTF (1) SOTF (1)
Master trip TRPPTRC1 Master Trip (1) 94/86 (1)
TRPPTRC2 Master Trip (2) 94/86 (2)
Table continues on next page

10 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 1
Introduction

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSI

Multipurpose protection MAPGAPC1 MAP (1) MAP (1)
MAPGAPC2 MAP (2) MAP (2)
MAPGAPC3 MAP (3) MAP (3)
MAPGAPC4 MAP (4) MAP (4)
MAPGAPC5 MAP (5) MAP (5)
MAPGAPC6 MAP (6) MAP (6)
MAPGAPC7 MAP (7) MAP (7)
MAPGAPC8 MAP (8) MAP (8)
MAPGAPC9 MAP (9) MAP (9)
MAPGAPC10 MAP (10) MAP (10)
MAPGAPC11 MAP (11) MAP (11)
MAPGAPC12 MAP (12) MAP (12)
MAPGAPC13 MAP (13) MAP (13)
MAPGAPC14 MAP (14) MAP (14)
MAPGAPC15 MAP (15) MAP (15)
MAPGAPC16 MAP (16) MAP (16)
MAPGAPC17 MAP (17) MAP (17)
MAPGAPC18 MAP (18) MAP (18)
Fault locator SCEFRFLO1 FLOC (1) 21FL (1)
Line differential protection with in-zone LNPLDF1 3Id/I> (1) 87L (1)
power transformer
High-impedance fault detection PHIZ1 HIF (1) HIZ (1)
Power quality
Current total demand distortion CMHAI1 PQM3I (1) PQM3I (1)
Voltage total harmonic distortion VMHAI1 PQM3U (1) PQM3V (1)
Voltage variation PHQVVR1 PQMU (1) PQMV (1)
Voltage unbalance VSQVUB1 PQUUB (1) PQVUB (1)
Control
Circuit-breaker control CBXCBR1 I <-> O CB (1) I <-> O CB (1)
Disconnector control DCXSWI1 I <-> O DCC (1) I <-> O DCC (1)
DCXSWI2 I <-> O DCC (2) I <-> O DCC (2)
Earthing switch control ESXSWI1 I <-> O ESC (1) I <-> O ESC (1)
Disconnector position indication DCSXSWI1 I <-> O DC (1) I <-> O DC (1)
DCSXSWI2 I <-> O DC (2) I <-> O DC (2)
DCSXSWI3 I <-> O DC (3) I <-> O DC (3)
Earthing switch indication ESSXSWI1 I <-> O ES (1) I <-> O ES (1)
ESSXSWI2 I <-> O ES (2) I <-> O ES (2)
Autoreclosing DARREC1 O -> I (1) 79 (1)
Synchronism and energizing check SECRSYN1 SYNC (1) 25 (1)
Condition monitoring and supervision
Table continues on next page

RED615 11
Application Manual
Section 1 1MRS756498 M
Introduction

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSI

Circuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR1 CBCM (1) CBCM (1)
Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR1 TCS (1) TCM (1)
TCSSCBR2 TCS (2) TCM (2)
Current circuit supervision CCSPVC1 MCS 3I (1) MCS 3I (1)
Fuse failure supervision SEQSPVC1 FUSEF (1) 60 (1)
Protection communication supervision PCSITPC1 PCS (1) PCS (1)
Runtime counter for machines and MDSOPT1 OPTS (1) OPTM (1)
devices
Measurement
Disturbance recorder RDRE1 DR (1) DFR (1)
Load profile record LDPRLRC1 LOADPROF (1) LOADPROF (1)
Fault record FLTRFRC1 FAULTREC (1) FAULTREC (1)
Three-phase current measurement CMMXU1 3I (1) 3I (1)
Sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 I1, I2, I0 (1) I1, I2, I0 (1)
Residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 Io (1) In (1)
Three-phase voltage measurement VMMXU1 3U (1) 3V (1)
VMMXU2 3U (2) 3V (2)
Residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1 Uo (1) Vn (1)
Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 U1, U2, U0 (1) V1, V2, V0 (1)
Three-phase power and energy PEMMXU1 P, E (1) P, E (1)
measurement
RTD/mA measurement XRGGIO130 X130 (RTD) (1) X130 (RTD) (1)
Frequency measurement FMMXU1 f (1) f (1)
IEC 61850-9-2 LE sampled value sending SMVSENDER SMVSENDER SMVSENDER
IEC 61850-9-2 LE sampled value SMVRCV SMVRCV SMVRCV
receiving (voltage sharing)
Other
Minimum pulse timer (2 pcs) TPGAPC1 TP (1) TP (1)
TPGAPC2 TP (2) TP (2)
TPGAPC3 TP (3) TP (3)
TPGAPC4 TP (4) TP (4)
Minimum pulse timer (2 pcs, second TPSGAPC1 TPS (1) TPS (1)
resolution)
Minimum pulse timer (2 pcs, minute TPMGAPC1 TPM (1) TPM (1)
resolution)
Pulse timer (8 pcs) PTGAPC1 PT (1) PT (1)
PTGAPC2 PT (2) PT (2)
Time delay off (8 pcs) TOFGAPC1 TOF (1) TOF (1)
TOFGAPC2 TOF (2) TOF (2)
TOFGAPC3 TOF (3) TOF (3)
TOFGAPC4 TOF (4) TOF (4)
Table continues on next page

12 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 1
Introduction

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSI

Time delay on (8 pcs) TONGAPC1 TON (1) TON (1)
TONGAPC2 TON (2) TON (2)
TONGAPC3 TON (3) TON (3)
TONGAPC4 TON (4) TON (4)
Set-reset (8 pcs) SRGAPC1 SR (1) SR (1)
SRGAPC2 SR (2) SR (2)
SRGAPC3 SR (3) SR (3)
SRGAPC4 SR (4) SR (4)
Move (8 pcs) MVGAPC1 MV (1) MV (1)
MVGAPC2 MV (2) MV (2)
Generic control point (16 pcs) SPCGAPC1 SPC (1) SPC (1)
SPCGAPC2 SPC (2) SPC (2)
Analog value scaling SCA4GAPC1 SCA4 (1) SCA4 (1)
SCA4GAPC2 SCA4 (2) SCA4 (2)
SCA4GAPC3 SCA4 (3) SCA4 (3)
SCA4GAPC4 SCA4 (4) SCA4 (4)
Integer value move MVI4GAPC1 MVI4 (1) MVI4 (1)

RED615 13
Application Manual
14
1MRS756498 M Section 2
RED615 overview

Section 2 RED615 overview

2.1 Overview

RED615 is a phase-segregated two-end line differential protection and control relay

designed for utility and industrial power systems, including radial, looped and meshed
distribution networks with or without distributed power generation. RED615 is also
designed for the protection of line differential applications with a transformer within
the protection zone. RED615 relays communicate between substations over a fiber
optic link or a galvanic pilot wire connection. RED615 is a member of ABBs Relion
product family and part of its 615 protection and control product series. The 615 series
relays are characterized by their compactness and withdrawable-unit design. Re-
engineered from the ground up, the 615 series has been guided by the IEC 61850
standard for communication and interoperability of substation automation equipment.

The relay provides unit type main protection for overhead lines and cable feeders in
distribution networks. The relay also features current-based protection functions for
remote back-up for down-stream protection relays and local back-up for the line
differential main protection. Further, standard configurations B and C also include
earth-fault protection. Standard configurations D and E include directional
overcurrent and voltage based protection functions.

The relay is adapted for the protection of overhead line and cable feeders in isolated
neutral, resistance earthed, compensated (impedance earthed) and solidly earthed
networks. Once the relay has been given the application-specific settings, it can
directly be put into service.

The 615 series relays support a range of communication protocols including IEC
61850 with Edition 2 support, process bus according to IEC 61850-9-2 LE, IEC
60870-5-103, Modbus and DNP3. Profibus DPV1 communication protocol is
supported by using the protocol converter SPA-ZC 302.

RED615 15
Application Manual
Section 2 1MRS756498 M
RED615 overview

2.1.1 Product version history

Product version Product history
1.1 Product released
2.0 Support for DNP3 serial or TCP/IP
Support for IEC 60870-5-103
New standard configurations B and C
Disturbance recorder upload via WHMI

3.0 Additions to configuration B

Application configurability support
Analog GOOSE support
Large display with single line diagram
Enhanced mechanical design
Increased maximum amount of events and fault records
Admittance-based earth-fault protection
Residual overvoltage protection
Low voltage power supply option
Pilot wire modem support

4.0 Additions/changes for configurations A-C

Dual fiber-optic Ethernet communication option (COM0032)
Generic control point (SPCGGIO) function blocks
Additional logic blocks
Button object for SLD
Controllable disconnector and earth switch objects for SLD
Wattmetric based E/F
Harmonics based E/F
Increased maximum amount of events and fault records

4.0 FP1 Parallel use of IEC 61850 and DNP3 protocols

Parallel use of IEC 61850 and IEC 60870-5-103 protocols
Two selectable indication colors for LEDs (red or green)
Online binary signal monitoring with PCM600

5.0 New configurations D and E

New layout in Application Configuration tool for all configurations
In-zone transformer application support
Fault locator
Load profile recorder
Optional RTD/mA inputs
Profibus adapter support
Support for multiple SLD pages
Import/export of settings via WHMI
Setting usability improvements
HMI event filtering tool

5.0 FP1 IEC 61850 Edition 2

Currents sending support with IEC 61850-9-2 LE
Support for synchronism and energizing check with IEC 61850-9-2 LE
High-availability seamless redundancy (HSR) protocol
Parallel redundancy protocol (PRP-1)
Support for configuration migration (starting from Ver.3.0 to Ver.5.0 FP1)
Software closable Ethernet ports
Chinese language support
Report summary via WHMI
Voltage unbalance power quality option
Switch onto fault
Additional timer, set-reset and analog value scaling functions

16 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 2
RED615 overview

2.1.2 PCM600 and relay connectivity package version

Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600 2.6 (Rollup 20150626) or later
RED615 Connectivity Package Ver.5.1 or later
Parameter Setting
Signal Monitoring
Event Viewer
Disturbance Handling
Application Configuration
Signal Matrix
Graphical Display Editor
Communication Management
IED User Management
IED Compare
Firmware Update
Fault Record tool
Load Record Profile
Lifecycle Traceability
Configuration Wizard
AR Sequence Visualizer
Label Printing
IEC 61850 Configuration
IED Configuration Migration
Differential Characteristics Tool

Download connectivity packages from the ABB Web site

http://www.abb.com/substationautomation or directly with the
Update Manager in PCM600.

2.2 Operation functionality

2.2.1 Optional functions

Autoreclosing (configurations B, C, D and E only)
Modbus TCP/IP or RTU/ASCII
IEC 60870-5-103
DNP3 TCP/IP or serial
Admittance-based earth-fault protection (configurations B, D and E only)
Wattmetric-based earth-fault protection (configurations B, D and E only)
Harmonics-based earth-fault protection (configurations B, C, D and E only)
Power quality functions (configurations D and E only)
Fault locator (configurations D and E only)

RED615 17
Application Manual
Section 2 1MRS756498 M
RED615 overview

RTD/mA measurement (configuration D only)

IEC 61850-9-2 LE (configurations D and E only, with 2 LC only)
IEEE 1588 v2 time synchronization (with 2 LC only)

2.3 Physical hardware

The protection relay consists of two main parts: plug-in unit and case. The content
depends on the ordered functionality.
Table 2: Plug-in unit and case
Main Slot ID Content options
Plug-in - HMI Small (5 lines, 20 characters)
unit Large (10 lines, 20 characters) with SLD
Small Chinese (3 lines, 8 or more characters)
Large Chinese (7 lines, 8 or more characters) with
SLD
X100 Auxiliary power/BO 48-250 V DC/100-240 V AC; or 24-60 V DC
module 2 normally-open PO contacts
1 change-over SO contacts
1 normally open SO contact
2 double-pole PO contacts with TCS
1 dedicated internal fault output contact
X110 BIO module 8 binary inputs
4 SO contacts
X120 AI/BI module Only with configuration B:
3 phase current inputs (1/5 A)
1 residual current input (1/5 A or 0.2/1 A)1)
1 residual voltage input (60-210 V)
3 binary inputs
Only with configurations A, C and D:
3 phase current inputs (1/5 A)
1 residual current input (1/5 A or 0.2/1 A)1)
4 binary inputs
Table continues on next page

18 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 2
RED615 overview

Main Slot ID Content options

Case X130 AI/BI module Only with configuration D:
3 phase voltage inputs (60-210 V)
1 residual voltage input (60-210 V)
4 binary inputs
AI/RTD/mA module Only with configuration D:
3 phase voltage inputs (60-210 V)
1 residual voltage input (60-210 V)
1 generic mA input
2 RTD sensor inputs
Sensor input module Only with configuration E:
3 combi sensor inputs (three-phase current and
voltage)
1 residual current input (0.2/1 A)1)
Optional BIO module Optional for configurations A, B and C:
6 binary inputs
3 SO contacts
X000 Communication module See the technical manual for details about different
types of communication modules.

1) The 0.2/1 A input is normally used in applications requiring sensitive earth-fault protection and featuring
core-balance current transformers.

Rated values of the current and voltage inputs are basic setting parameters of the
protection relay. The binary input thresholds are selectable within the range 16176
V DC by adjusting the binary input setting parameters.

See the installation manual for more information about the case and
the plug-in unit.

The connection diagrams of different hardware modules are presented in this manual.
Table 3: Input/output overview
Std. Order code digit Analog channels Binary channels
conf. 5-6 7-8 CT VT Combi BI BO RTD mA
sensor
4 - - 12 4 PO - -
AD
+ 6 SO
A AC
4 - - 18 4 PO - -
AF
+ 9 SO
4 1 - 11 4 PO - -
AC
+ 6 SO
B AA / AB
4 1 - 17 4 PO - -
AE
+ 9 SO
4 - - 12 4 PO - -
AD
+ 6 SO
C AC
4 - - 18 4 PO - -
AF
+ 9 SO
Table continues on next page

RED615 19
Application Manual
Section 2 1MRS756498 M
RED615 overview

Std. Order code digit Analog channels Binary channels

conf. 5-6 7-8 CT VT Combi BI BO RTD mA
sensor
4 5 - 12 4 PO 2 1
FE / FF AD
+ 6 SO
D
4 5 - 16 4 PO - -
AE / AF AG
+ 6 SO
1 - 3 8 4 PO - -
E DA AH
+ 6 SO

2.4 Local HMI

The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling the protection relay. The
LHMI comprises the display, buttons, LED indicators and communication port.

REF615

Overcurrent
Dir. earth-fault
Voltage protection
Phase unbalance
Thermal overload
Breaker failure
Disturb. rec. Triggered
CB condition monitoring
Supervision
Arc detected
Autoreclose shot in progr.

A070704 V4 EN

Figure 2: Example of the LHMI

20 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 2
RED615 overview

2.4.1 Display
The LHMI includes a graphical display that supports two character sizes. The
character size depends on the selected language. The amount of characters and rows
fitting the view depends on the character size.
Table 4: Small display

Character size1) Rows in the view Characters per row

Small, mono-spaced (6 12 pixels) 5 20
Large, variable width (13 14 pixels) 3 8 or more

1) Depending on the selected language

Table 5: Large display

Character size1) Rows in the view Characters per row

Small, mono-spaced (6 12 pixels) 10 20
Large, variable width (13 14 pixels) 7 8 or more

1) Depending on the selected language

The display view is divided into four basic areas.

1 2

3 4
A070705 V3 EN

Figure 3: Display layout

1 Header
2 Icon
3 Content
4 Scroll bar (displayed when needed)

RED615 21
Application Manual
Section 2 1MRS756498 M
RED615 overview

2.4.2 LEDs
The LHMI includes three protection indicators above the display: Ready, Start and
Trip.

There are 11 matrix programmable LEDs on front of the LHMI. The LEDs can be
configured with PCM600 and the operation mode can be selected with the LHMI,
WHMI or PCM600.

2.4.3 Keypad
The LHMI keypad contains push buttons which are used to navigate in different views
or menus. With the push buttons you can give open or close commands to objects in
the primary circuit, for example, a circuit breaker, a contactor or a disconnector. The
push buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset indications, provide help and
switch between local and remote control mode.

A071176 V1 EN

Figure 4: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push
buttons and RJ-45 communication port

2.5 Web HMI

The WHMI allows secure access to the protection relay via a Web browser. When the
Secure Communication parameter in the protection relay is activated, the Web server
is forced to take a secured (HTTPS) connection to WHMI using TLS encryption.The
WHMI is verified with Internet Explorer 8.0, 9.0, 10.0 and 11.0.

WHMI is disabled by default.

WHMI offers several functions.

22 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 2
RED615 overview

Programmable LEDs and event lists

System supervision
Parameter settings
Measurement display
Disturbance records
Fault records
Load profile record
Phasor diagram
Single-line diagram
Importing/Exporting parameters
Report summary

The menu tree structure on the WHMI is almost identical to the one on the LHMI.

A070754 V6 EN

Figure 5: Example view of the WHMI

The WHMI can be accessed locally and remotely.

Locally by connecting the laptop to the protection relay via the front
communication port.
Remotely over LAN/WAN.

RED615 23
Application Manual
Section 2 1MRS756498 M
RED615 overview

2.6 Authorization

Four user categories have been predefined for the LHMI and the WHMI, each with
different rights and default passwords.

The default passwords in the protection relay delivered from the factory can be
changed with Administrator user rights.

User authorization is disabled by default for LHMI but WHMI always

uses authorization.

Table 6: Predefined user categories

Username User rights
VIEWER Read only access
OPERATOR
Selecting remote or local state with (only locally)
Changing setting groups
Controlling
Clearing indications

ENGINEER Changing settings

Clearing event list
Clearing disturbance records
Changing system settings such as IP address, serial baud rate or
disturbance recorder settings
Setting the protection relay to test mode
Selecting language

ADMINISTRATOR All listed above

Changing password
Factory default activation

For user authorization for PCM600, see PCM600 documentation.

2.6.1 Audit trail

The protection relay offers a large set of event-logging functions. Critical system and
protection relay security-related events are logged to a separate nonvolatile audit trail
for the administrator.

Audit trail is a chronological record of system activities that allows the reconstruction
and examination of the sequence of system and security-related events and changes in
the protection relay. Both audit trail events and process related events can be
examined and analyzed in a consistent method with the help of Event List in LHMI
and WHMI and Event Viewer in PCM600.

24 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 2
RED615 overview

The protection relay stores 2048 audit trail events to the nonvolatile audit trail.
Additionally, 1024 process events are stored in a nonvolatile event list. Both the audit
trail and event list work according to the FIFO principle. Nonvolatile memory is based
on a memory type which does not need battery backup nor regular component change
to maintain the memory storage.

Audit trail events related to user authorization (login, logout, violation remote and
violation local) are defined according to the selected set of requirements from IEEE
1686. The logging is based on predefined user names or user categories. The user audit
trail events are accessible with IEC 61850-8-1, PCM600, LHMI and WHMI.
Table 7: Audit trail events
Audit trail event Description
Configuration change Configuration files changed
Firmware change Firmware changed
Firmware change fail Firmware change failed
Attached to retrofit test case Unit has been attached to retrofit case
Removed from retrofit test case Removed from retrofit test case
Setting group remote User changed setting group remotely
Setting group local User changed setting group locally
Control remote DPC object control remote
Control local DPC object control local
Test on Test mode on
Test off Test mode off
Reset trips Reset latched trips (TRPPTRC*)
Setting commit Settings have been changed
Time change Time changed directly by the user. Note that this is not used
when the protection relay is synchronised properly by the
appropriate protocol (SNTP, IRIG-B, IEEE 1588 v2).
View audit log Administrator accessed audit trail
Login Successful login from IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS), WHMI, FTP or
LHMI.
Logout Successful logout from IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS), WHMI, FTP or
LHMI.
Password change Password changed
Firmware reset Reset issued by user or tool
Audit overflow Too many audit events in the time period
Violation remote Unsuccessful login attempt from IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS),
WHMI, FTP or LHMI.
Violation local Unsuccessful login attempt from IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS),
WHMI, FTP or LHMI.

PCM600 Event Viewer can be used to view the audit trail events and process related
events. Audit trail events are visible through dedicated Security events view. Since
only the administrator has the right to read audit trail, authorization must be used in

RED615 25
Application Manual
Section 2 1MRS756498 M
RED615 overview

PCM600. The audit trail cannot be reset, but PCM600 Event Viewer can filter data.
Audit trail events can be configured to be visible also in LHMI/WHMI Event list
together with process related events.

To expose the audit trail events through Event list, define the
Authority logging level parameter via Configuration/
Authorization/Security. This exposes audit trail events to all users.

Table 8: Comparison of authority logging levels

Audit trail event Authority logging level
Configurati Setting Setting Settings All
None on change group group, edit
control
Configuration change
Firmware change
Firmware change fail
Attached to retrofit test
case
Removed from retrofit
test case
Setting group remote
Setting group local
Control remote
Control local
Test on
Test off
Reset trips
Setting commit
Time change
View audit log
Login
Logout
Password change
Firmware reset
Violation local
Violation remote

2.7 Communication

The protection relay supports a range of communication protocols including IEC

61850, IEC 61850-9-2 LE, IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus and DNP3. Profibus DPV1

26 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 2
RED615 overview

communication protocol is supported by using the protocol converter SPA-ZC 302.

Operational information and controls are available through these protocols. However,
some communication functionality, for example, horizontal communication between
the protection relays, is only enabled by the IEC 61850 communication protocol.

The IEC 61850 communication implementation supports all monitoring and control
functions. Additionally, parameter settings, disturbance recordings and fault records
can be accessed using the IEC 61850 protocol. Disturbance recordings are available
to any Ethernet-based application in the IEC 60255-24 standard COMTRADE file
format. The protection relay can send and receive binary signals from other devices
(so-called horizontal communication) using the IEC 61850-8-1 GOOSE profile,
where the highest performance class with a total transmission time of 3 ms is
supported. Furthermore, the protection relay supports sending and receiving of analog
values using GOOSE messaging. The protection relay meets the GOOSE
performance requirements for tripping applications in distribution substations, as
defined by the IEC 61850 standard.

The protection relay can support five simultaneous clients. If PCM600 reserves one
client connection, only four client connections are left, for example, for IEC 61850
and Modbus.

All communication connectors, except for the front port connector, are placed on
integrated optional communication modules. The protection relay can be connected to
Ethernet-based communication systems via the RJ-45 connector (100Base-TX) or the
fiber-optic LC connector (100Base-FX). An optional serial interface is available for
RS-232/RS-485 communication.

2.7.1 Self-healing Ethernet ring

For the correct operation of self-healing loop topology, it is essential that the external
switches in the network support the RSTP protocol and that it is enabled in the
switches. Otherwise, connecting the loop topology can cause problems to the
network. The protection relay itself does not support link-down detection or RSTP.
The ring recovery process is based on the aging of the MAC addresses, and the link-
up/link-down events can cause temporary breaks in communication. For a better
performance of the self-healing loop, it is recommended that the external switch
furthest from the protection relay loop is assigned as the root switch (bridge priority
= 0) and the bridge priority increases towards the protection relay loop. The end links
of the protection relay loop can be attached to the same external switch or to two
adjacent external switches. A self-healing Ethernet ring requires a communication
module with at least two Ethernet interfaces for all protection relays.

RED615 27
Application Manual
Section 2 1MRS756498 M
RED615 overview

Client A Client B

Network A
Network B

Managed Ethernet switch Managed Ethernet switch

with RSTP support with RSTP support

GUID-283597AF-9F38-4FC7-B87A-73BFDA272D0F V3 EN

Figure 6: Self-healing Ethernet ring solution

The Ethernet ring solution supports the connection of up to 30

protection relays. If more than 30 protection relays are to be
connected, it is recommended that the network is split into several
rings with no more than 30 protection relays per ring. Each protection
relay has a 50-s store-and-forward delay, and to fulfil the
performance requirements for fast horizontal communication, the
ring size is limited to 30 protection relays.

2.7.2 Ethernet redundancy

IEC 61850 specifies a network redundancy scheme that improves the system
availability for substation communication. It is based on two complementary
protocols defined in the IEC 62439-3:2012 standard: parallel redundancy protocol
PRP-1 and high-availability seamless redundancy HSR protocol. Both protocols rely
on the duplication of all transmitted information via two Ethernet ports for one logical
network connection. Therefore, both are able to overcome the failure of a link or
switch with a zero-switchover time, thus fulfilling the stringent real-time
requirements for the substation automation horizontal communication and time
synchronization.

PRP specifies that each device is connected in parallel to two local area networks.
HSR applies the PRP principle to rings and to the rings of rings to achieve cost-
effective redundancy. Thus, each device incorporates a switch element that forwards
frames from port to port. The HSR/PRP option is available for all 615 series protection
relays. However, RED615 supports this option only over fiber optics.

28 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 2
RED615 overview

IEC 62439-3:2012 cancels and replaces the first edition published in

2010. These standard versions are also referred to as IEC 62439-3
Edition 1 and IEC 62439-3 Edition 2. The protection relay supports
IEC 62439-3:2012 and it is not compatible with IEC 62439-3:2010.

PRP
Each PRP node, called a doubly attached node with PRP (DAN), is attached to two
independent LANs operated in parallel. These parallel networks in PRP are called
LAN A and LAN B. The networks are completely separated to ensure failure
independence, and they can have different topologies. Both networks operate in
parallel, thus providing zero-time recovery and continuous checking of redundancy to
avoid communication failures. Non-PRP nodes, called single attached nodes (SANs),
are either attached to one network only (and can therefore communicate only with
DANs and SANs attached to the same network), or are attached through a redundancy
box, a device that behaves like a DAN.

COM600
SCADA

Ethernet switch Ethernet switch

IEC 61850 PRP

REF615 REF620 RET620 REM620 REF615

GUID-334D26B1-C3BD-47B6-BD9D-2301190A5E9D V1 EN

Figure 7: PRP solution

In case a laptop or a PC workstation is connected as a non-PRP node to one of the PRP

networks, LAN A or LAN B, it is recommended to use a redundancy box device or an
Ethernet switch with similar functionality between the PRP network and SAN to
remove additional PRP information from the Ethernet frames. In some cases, default
PC workstation adapters are not able to handle the maximum-length Ethernet frames
with the PRP trailer.

There are different alternative ways to connect a laptop or a workstation as SAN to a

PRP network.

RED615 29
Application Manual
Section 2 1MRS756498 M
RED615 overview

Via an external redundancy box (RedBox) or a switch capable of connecting to

PRP and normal networks
By connecting the node directly to LAN A or LAN B as SAN
By connecting the node to the protection relay's interlink port

HSR
HSR applies the PRP principle of parallel operation to a single ring, treating the two
directions as two virtual LANs. For each frame sent, a node, DAN, sends two frames,
one over each port. Both frames circulate in opposite directions over the ring and each
node forwards the frames it receives, from one port to the other. When the originating
node receives a frame sent to itself, it discards that to avoid loops; therefore, no ring
protocol is needed. Individually attached nodes, SANs, such as laptops and printers,
must be attached through a redundancy box that acts as a ring element. For example,
a 615 or 620 series protection relay with HSR support can be used as a redundancy
box.

GUID-207430A7-3AEC-42B2-BC4D-3083B3225990 V1 EN

Figure 8: HSR solution

2.7.3 Process bus

Process bus IEC 61850-9-2 defines the transmission of Sampled Measured Values
within the substation automation system. International Users Group created a
guideline IEC 61850-9-2 LE that defines an application profile of IEC 61850-9-2 to
facilitate implementation and enable interoperability. Process bus is used for
distributing process data from the primary circuit to all process bus compatible IEDs
in the local network in a real-time manner. The data can then be processed by any IED
to perform different protection, automation and control functions.

30 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 2
RED615 overview

UniGear Digital switchgear concept relies on the process bus together with current
and voltage sensors. The process bus enables several advantages for the UniGear
Digital like simplicity with reduced wiring, flexibility with data availability to all
IEDs, improved diagnostics and longer maintenance cycles.

With process bus the galvanic interpanel wiring for sharing busbar voltage value can
be replaced with Ethernet communication. Transmitting measurement samples over
process bus brings also higher error detection because the signal transmission is
automatically supervised. Additional contribution to the higher availability is the
possibility to use redundant Ethernet network for transmitting SMV signals.

Common Ethernet
Station bus (IEC 61850-8-1), process bus (IEC 61850-9-2 LE) and IEEE 1588 v2 time synchronization

GOOSE

GOOSE
GOOSE

GOOSE

GOOSE

GOOSE

GOOSE
SMV

SMV

SMV

SMV

SMV

SMV

SMV
GUID-2371EFA7-4369-4F1A-A23F-CF0CE2D474D3 V4 EN

Figure 9: Process bus application of voltage sharing and synchrocheck

The 615 series supports IEC 61850 process bus with sampled values of analog
currents and voltages. The measured values are transferred as sampled values using
the IEC 61850-9-2 LE protocol which uses the same physical Ethernet network as the
IEC 61850-8-1 station bus. The intended application for sampled values is sharing the
measured voltages from one 615 series IED to other IEDs with phase voltage based
functions and 9-2 support.

The 615 series IEDs with process bus based applications use IEEE 1588 v2 Precision
Time Protocol (PTP) according to IEEE C37.238-2011 Power Profile for high
accuracy time synchronization. With IEEE 1588 v2, the cabling infrastructure
requirement is reduced by allowing time synchronization information to be
transported over the same Ethernet network as the data communications.

RED615 31
Application Manual
Section 2 1MRS756498 M
RED615 overview

Primary Secondary
IEEE 1588 v2 IEEE 1588 v2
master clock master clock
(optional)

Managed HSR Managed HSR

Ethernet Ethernet
switch switch

IEC 61850
HSR

SMV traffic
Backup 1588
master clock

GUID-7C56BC1F-F1B2-4E74-AB8E-05001A88D53D V4 EN

Figure 10: Example network topology with process bus, redundancy and IEEE
1588 v2 time synchronization

The process bus option is available for all 615 series IEDs equipped with phase
voltage inputs. Another requirement is a communication card with IEEE 1588 v2
support (COM0031...COM0037). However, RED615 supports this option only with
the communication card variant having fiber optic station bus ports. See the IEC
61850 engineering guide for detailed system requirements and configuration details.

2.7.4 Secure communication

The protection relay supports secure communication for WHMI and file transfer
protocol. If the Secure Communication parameter is activated, protocols require TLS
based encryption method support from the clients. In this case WHMI must be
connected from a Web browser using the HTTPS protocol and in case of file transfer
the client must use FTPS.

2.7.5 Protection communication and supervision

The communication between the relays is enabled by means of a dedicated fiber optic
communication channel. 1310 nm multi-mode or single-mode fibers with LC
connectors are used for line differential communication. The channel is used for
transferring the phase segregated current value data between the relays. The current
phasors from the two relays, geographically located apart from each other, must be
time coordinated so that the current differential algorithm can be executed correctly.
The so called echo method is used for time synchronization. No external devices such
as GPS clocks are thereby needed for the line differential protection communication.

32 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 2
RED615 overview

Apart from the continued protection communication, the communication channel can
also be used for binary signal transfer (BST) that is, transferring of user configurable
binary information between the relays. There are a total of eight BST signals available
for user definable purposes. The BST signals can originate from the relays binary
inputs or internal logics, and be assigned to the remote relays binary outputs or
internal logics.

The protection communication supervision continuously monitors the protection

communication link. The relay immediately blocks the line differential protection
function in case that severe interference in the communication link, risking the correct
operation of the function, is detected. An alarm signal will eventually be issued if the
interference, indicating permanent failure in the protection communication, persists.
The two high-set stages of the overcurrent protection are further by default released.

RED615 RED615

Fibre-optic line differential

communication link

Protection communication and supervision

Binary signal transfer

GUID-8CE71CC9-F0EA-4BE9-B693-173CAEA9FA58 V2 EN

Figure 11: Fiber optic protection communication link

RED615 33
Application Manual
34
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

Section 3 RED615 standard configurations

3.1 Standard configurations

RED615 is available in five alternative standard configurations. The standard signal

configuration can be altered by means of the signal matrix or the graphical application
functionality of the Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600. Further, the
application configuration functionality of PCM600 supports the creation of multi-
layer logic functions utilizing various logical elements including timers and flip-flops.
By combining protection functions with logic function blocks the relay configuration
can be adapted to user specific application requirements.

The relay is delivered from the factory with default connections described in the
functional diagrams for binary inputs, binary outputs, function-to-function
connections and alarm LEDs. Some of the supported functions in RED615 must be
added with the Application Configuration tool to be available in the Signal Matrix tool
and in the relay. The positive measuring direction of directional protection functions
is towards the outgoing feeder.
Table 9: Standard configurations
Description Std. conf.
Line differential protection A
Line differential protection with directional earth-fault protection and circuit-breaker
B
condition monitoring
Line differential protection with non-directional earth-fault protection and circuit-breaker
C
condition monitoring
Line differential protection with directional overcurrent and earth-fault protection, voltage
and frequency based protection and measurements, synchro-check and circuit-breaker D
condition monitoring (RTD option, optional power quality and fault locator)
Line differential protection with directional overcurrent and earth-fault protection, voltage
and frequency based protection and measurements, and circuit-breaker condition
E
monitoring (sensor inputs, optional power quality, fault locator and synchro-check with
IEC 61850-9-2 LE)

Table 10: Supported functions

Function IEC 61850 A B C D E

Protection
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection, low stage PHLPTOC 1 1 1
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection, high PHHPTOC 2 2 2
stage
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection, PHIPTOC 1 1 1 1 1
instantaneous stage
Three-phase directional overcurrent protection, low stage DPHLPDOC 2 2
Three-phase directional overcurrent protection, high stage DPHHPDOC 1 1

Table continues on next page

RED615 35
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

Function IEC 61850 A B C D E

Non-directional earth-fault protection, low stage EFLPTOC 2
Non-directional earth-fault protection, high stage EFHPTOC 1
Non-directional earth-fault protection, instantaneous stage EFIPTOC 1
Directional earth-fault protection, low stage DEFLPDEF 2 1) 2 2 2)
Directional earth-fault protection, high stage DEFHPDEF 1 1) 1 1 2)
Admittance-based earth-fault protection 3) EFPADM (3) 1)3) (3) 3) (3) 2)3)
Wattmetric-based earth-fault protection 3) WPWDE (3) 1)3) (3) 3) (3) 2)3)
Transient/intermittent earth-fault protection INTRPTEF 1 1)4) 1 4) 1 2)4)
Harmonics-based earth-fault protection 3) HAEFPTOC (1)3)4) (1) 3)4) (1) 3)4) (1) 3)4)
Non-directional (cross-country) earth-fault protection, using EFHPTOC 1 1 1
calculated Io
Negative-sequence overcurrent protection NSPTOC 2 2 2 2 2
Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC 1 1 1 1
Residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV 3 1) 3 3 2)
Three-phase undervoltage protection PHPTUV 3 3
Three-phase overvoltage protection PHPTOV 3 3
Positive-sequence undervoltage protection PSPTUV 1 1
Negative-sequence overvoltage protection NSPTOV 1 1
Frequency protection FRPFRQ 4 4
Three-phase thermal protection for feeders, cables and T1PTTR 1 1 1 1
distribution transformers
Three-phase thermal overload protection, two time constants T2PTTR 1 1 1 1
Binary signal transfer BSTGGIO 1 1 1 1 1
Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF 1 5) 1 1 1 1
Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR 1 1 1 1 1
Switch onto fault CBPSOF 1 1 1 1 1
Master trip TRPPTRC 2 2 2 2 2
Multipurpose protection MAPGAPC 18 18 18 18 18
Fault locator SCEFRFLO (1) (1)
Line differential protection with in-zone power transformer LNPLDF 1 1 1 1 1
High-impedance fault detection PHIZ 1 1 1 1
Power quality
Current total demand distortion CMHAI (1) 6) (1) 6)
Voltage total harmonic distortion VMHAI (1) 6) (1) 6)
Voltage variation PHQVVR (1) 6) (1) 6)
Voltage unbalance VSQVUB (1) 6) (1) 6)
Control
Circuit-breaker control CBXCBR 1 1 1 1 1
Disconnector control DCXSWI 2 2 2 2 2
Earthing switch control ESXSWI 1 1 1 1 1
Disconnector position indication DCSXSWI 3 3 3 3 3
Earthing switch indication ESSXSWI 2 2 2 2 2
Autoreclosing DARREC (1) (1) (1) (1)
Synchronism and energizing check SECRSYN 1 (1) 7)
Condition monitoring and supervision
Circuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR 1 1 1 1
Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR 2 2 2 2 2
Current circuit supervision CCSPVC 1 1 1 1 1
Fuse failure supervision SEQSPVC 1 1
Protection communication supervision PCSITPC 1 1 1 1 1
Runtime counter for machines and devices MDSOPT 1 1 1 1 1
Measurement

Table continues on next page

36 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

Function IEC 61850 A B C D E

Disturbance recorder RDRE 1 1 1 1 1
Load profile record LDPRLRC 1 1 1 1 1
Fault record FLTRFRC 1 1 1 1 1
Three-phase current measurement CMMXU 1 1 1 1 1
Sequence current measurement CSMSQI 1 1 1 1 1
Residual current measurement RESCMMXU 1 1 1 1
Three-phase voltage measurement VMMXU 2 1
(1) 7)
Residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU 1 1
Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI 1 1
Three-phase power and energy measurement PEMMXU 1 1
RTD/mA measurement XRGGIO130 (1)
Frequency measurement FMMXU 1 1
IEC 61850-9-2 LE sampled value sending 7)8) SMVSENDER (1) (1)
IEC 61850-9-2 LE sampled value receiving (voltage sharing) SMVRCV (1) (1)
7)8)

Other
Minimum pulse timer (2 pcs) TPGAPC 4 4 4 4 4
Minimum pulse timer (2 pcs, second resolution) TPSGAPC 1 1 1 1 1
Minimum pulse timer (2 pcs, minute resolution) TPMGAPC 1 1 1 1 1
Pulse timer (8 pcs) PTGAPC 2 2 2 2 2
Time delay off (8 pcs) TOFGAPC 4 4 4 4 4
Time delay on (8 pcs) TONGAPC 4 4 4 4 4
Set-reset (8 pcs) SRGAPC 4 4 4 4 4
Move (8 pcs) MVGAPC 2 2 2 2 2
Generic control point (16 pcs) SPCGAPC 2 2 2 2 2
Analog value scaling (4 pcs) SCA4GAPC 4 4 4 4 4
Integer value move (4 pcs) MVI4GAPC 1 1 1 1 1
1, 2, ... = Number of included instances. The instances of a protection function represent the number of identical protection function blocks available in the
standard configuration.
() = optional

1) "Uo measured" is always used.

2) "Uo calculated" is always used.
3) One of the following can be ordered as an option: admittance-based E/F, wattmetric-based E/F or harmonics-based E/F.
4) "Io measured" is always used.
5) "Io calculated" is always used.
6) Power quality option includes current total demand distortion, voltage total harmonic distortion, voltage variation and voltage unbalance.
7) Available only with IEC 61850-9-2
8) Available only with COM0031...0037

3.1.1 Addition of control functions for primary devices and the use
of binary inputs and outputs
If extra control functions intended for controllable primary devices are added to the
configuration, additional binary inputs and/or outputs are needed to complement the
standard configuration.

If the number of inputs and/or outputs in a standard configuration is not sufficient, it

is possible either to modify the chosen IED standard configuration in order to release
some binary inputs or binary outputs which have originally been configured for other
purposes, or to integrate an external input/output module, for example RIO600, to the
IED.

RED615 37
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

The external I/O modules binary inputs and outputs can be used for the less time-
critical binary signals of the application. The integration enables releasing some
initially reserved binary inputs and outputs of the IEDs standard configuration.

The suitability of the IEDs binary outputs which have been selected for primary
device control should be carefully verified, for example make and carry and breaking
capacity. If the requirements for the primary device control circuit are not met, using
external auxiliary relays should be considered.

38 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

3.2 Connection diagrams

GUID-7A5D7398-4E4E-4B45-A561-01E3AF4C1640 V1 EN

Figure 12: Connection diagram for the A and C configurations

RED615 39
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

GUID-9A18BC7A-D172-4FD4-9C25-BF39C5879E5D V1 EN

Figure 13: Connection diagram for the B configuration

40 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

L1
L2
L3
A

N
n

da dn RED615
X120 X100
1 + 1
BI 1 U aux
Positive 2 2
-
Current
3 3
Direction BI 2
IRF
4
4 5
BI 3
P1
PO1
5
S1 BI 4
6 6
S2
7 1/5A 2) 7
IL1
8 N PO2
P2 9 1/5A
IL2 8
10 N 9
11 1/5A 10
IL3 SO1
12 N
1/5A 11
Io 12
14 N 13
P1 S1
SO2

S2
X130 14
P2
1 6) 16
BI 1 PO3
2
17
3 15
BI 2 19
4 TCS1 18
5 20
BI 3 22
6
PO4
7 21
BI 4
8 23
60 - TCS2 24
9 210V
U12B
10 N
60 -
11 210V
U1
12 N
60 -
13 210V
U2
14 N
60 -
15 210V
U3
16 N
60 -
17 210V
Uo
18 N

X110 X110
1 14
BI 1
2 SO1
16
3 15
BI 2
4 17
SO2
5
BI 3 19
6 18
20
BI 4 SO3
7
22
8 21
BI 5 23
9
SO4
BI 6 24
10

11
BI 7
12

BI 8
13

X1
1) 3)
LAN

X2
1) 3)
LAN

X5 1) 4)
1 GND
2 GNDC
3 IRIG-B -
4 IRIG-B + 1) Optional
5 AGND
6 B/- / TX 2) The IED features an automatic short-circuit
7 A/+ mechanism in the CT connector when plug-in
8 B/- unit is detached
9 A/+ / RX 3) 100BaseFx / LC or 100BaseTx / RJ-45
4) RS-485 serial bus
X12 5) Fibre Optic (ST) Serial Bus
1) 5)
RX 6) AIM0006 (5U+4BI)
TX Alternative Module AIM0003 (5U+2RTD+1mA)

X16
Line Differential Protection Communication

GUID-28FB3DA2-5BA8-4041-B17D-80C5B5F17D4D V2 EN

Figure 14: Connection diagram for the D configuration

RED615 41
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

L1

L2

L3

RED615
X130 X100
Positive +
Current 1
1 0,2/1A
U aux
Direction Io 2
2 N -
3
X131 IRF
4
4 5
IL1
5
7 PO1
U1
8
6
X132 7

4 PO2
IL2
5
8
7 9
U2
8 10
X133 SO1
11
4 12
IL3
5 13
7 SO2
U3
8 14
16
PO3
17
P1 S1 15
19
S2
TCS1 18
P2
20
22
X110 PO4
1 21
BI 1 23
2
TCS2 24
3
BI 2
4

5 X110
BI 3
6 14
SO1
BI 4 16
7 15
8 17
BI 5 SO2
9
19
18
BI 6 20
10
SO3
11 22
BI 7
12 21
23
BI 8 SO4
13 24

X1
1) 3)
LAN

X2
1) 3)
LAN

X5 1) 4)
1 GND
2 GNDC
3 IRIG-B -
4 IRIG-B +
5 AGND
6 B/- / TX
7 A/+
8 B/-
9 A/+ / RX

X12 1) Optional
1) 5) 3) 100BaseFx / LC or 100BaseTx / RJ-45
RX
4) RS-485 serial bus
TX
5) Fibre Optic (ST) Serial Bus
X16
Line Differential Protection Communication

GUID-D6DCAA04-E7EA-4926-BEED-D7BD476C9142 V1 EN

Figure 15: Connection diagram for the E configuration

42 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

3.3 Standard configuration A

3.3.1 Applications
The standard configuration for line current differential protection is intended for cable
feeder applications in the distribution networks. The standard configuration for line
current differential protection includes support for in-zone transformers.

The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with default
settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing and internal
signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be further adapted to
different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs by modifying the
internal functionality using PCM600.

RED615 43
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

3.3.2 Functions

RED615 LINE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION AND CONTROL RELAY

With in-zone power transformer support
STANDARD
CONFIGURATION
A

PROTECTION LOCAL HMI ALSO AVAILABLE

- Binary Signal Transfer function (BST)

2 - Disturbance and fault recorder
Master Trip
- Event log and recorded data
Conguration A
System

Lockout relay
HMI
Time
Authorization

- Local/Remote push button on LHMI

94/86 I ESC Clear
- Self-supervision
- Time synchronization: IEEE 1588 v2,
A
O R
L
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr SNTP, IRIG-B
- User management
IL2 0 A

2 - Web HMI
I2> 3I>>> 3I>/Io>BF I
AND
ESC Clear

3I 46 50P/51P 51BF/51NBF
O R
L
OR

2
3I> 3I>> 3I2f> 3dI>L
51P-1 51P-2 68 87L
CONDITION MONITORING COMMUNICATION
AND SUPERVISION
I Protocols:
Io IEC 61850-8-1
PHIZ MCS 3I OPTS Modbus
HIZ MCS 3I OPTM IEC 60870-5-103
DNP3
Interfaces:
2 Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC)
BST PCS TCS Serial: Serial glass ber (ST),
BST PCS TCM RS-485, RS-232
Redundant protocols:
HSR
PRP
18 RSTP
MAP SOTF
MAP SOTF

CONTROL AND INDICATION 1) MEASUREMENT

- I, Io
Object Ctrl 2)
Ind 3)
- Limit value supervision
CB 1 - - Load prole record
- Symmetrical components
DC 2 3
ES 1 2
1)
Check availability of binary inputs/outputs
Analog interface types 1)

from technical documentation Current transformer 4

2)
Control and indication function for
primary object Voltage transformer -
3)
Status indication function for
primary object
1)
Conventional transformer inputs

REMARKS
Optional 3 No. of Calculated OR Alternative
function instances value function to be
Io/Uo dened when
Sum of phase ordering
currents
3I I

RED615
AT REMOTE
END

GUID-78F52211-9D37-4A2F-9527-CD61BDEA68A2 V2 EN

Figure 16: Functionality overview for standard configuration A

3.3.2.1 Default I/O connections

Connector pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physical
connections section.

44 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

Table 11: Default connections for binary inputs

Binary input Description
X110-BI2 External start of breaker failure protection
X110-BI3 Setting group change
X110-BI4 Binary signal transfer input
X110-BI5 Disconnector open/truck in
X110-BI6 Disconnector open/truck out
X110-BI7 Earth-switch close
X110-BI8 Earth-switch open
X120-BI1 Blocking input for general use
X120-BI2 Circuit breaker close
X120-BI3 Circuit breaker open
X120-BI4 Lockout reset

Table 12: Default connections for binary outputs

Binary input Description
X100-PO1 Close circuit breaker
X100-PO2 Breaker failure backup trip to upstream breaker
X100-SO1 Line differential protection trip alarm
X100-SO2 Protection communication failure or differential protection not available
X100-PO3 Open circuit breaker/trip 1
X100-PO4 Open circuit breaker/trip 2
X110- SO1 Upstream overcurrent blocking
X110- SO2 Backup protection operated
X110- SO3 Binary transfer signal

Table 13: Default connections for LEDs

LED Description
1 Line differential protection biased stage operate
2 Line differential protection instantaneous stage operate
3 Line differential protection is not available
4 Protection communication failure
5 Current transformer failure detected
6 Phase or negative sequence component over current
7 Breaker failure operate
8 Disturbance recorder triggered
9 Trip circuit supervision alarm
10 Binary signal transfer receive
11 Binary signal transfer send

RED615 45
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

3.3.2.2 Default disturbance recorder settings

Table 14: Default disturbance recorder analog channels

Channel Description
1 IL1
2 IL2
3 IL3
4 Io
5 -
6 -
7 -
8 -
9 -
10 -
11 -
12 -

Table 15: Default disturbance recorder binary channels

Channel ID text Level trigger mode
1 LNPLDF1 - start Positive or Rising
2 LNPLDF1 - operate Positive or Rising
3 PHIPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
4 PHHPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
5 PHHPTOC2 - start Positive or Rising
6 PHLPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
7 NSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
8 NSPTOC2 - start Positive or Rising
9 CCBRBRF1 - trret Level trigger off
10 CCBRBRF1 - trbu Level trigger off
11 PHIPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
PHHPTOC1 - operate
PHHPTOC2 - operate
PHLPTOC1 - operate
12 NSPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
NSPTOC2 - operate
13 INRPHAR1 - blk2h Level trigger off
14 PCSITPC1 - alarm Level trigger off
15 LNPLDF1 - rstd2h Level trigger off
16 LNPLDF1 - prot not active Level trigger off
Table continues on next page

46 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

Channel ID text Level trigger mode

28 X110BI4 - binary transfer Level trigger off
29 X110BI2 - ext ccbrbrf start Level trigger off
30 X120BI3 - CB opened Level trigger off
31 X120BI2 - CB closed Level trigger off
32 X120BI1 - ext OC blocking Level trigger off

3.3.3 Functional diagrams

The functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and function-
to-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed with
PCM600 according to the application requirements.

The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside the
IEDs standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels available for the
disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbance
recorders parameter settings.

The phase currents to the IED are fed from a current transformer. The residual current
to the IED is fed from either residually connected CTs, an external core balance CT,
neutral CT or internally calculated.

The IED offers six different settings group which can be set based on individual needs.
Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting group settings available
in the IED or via binary input.

Depending on the communication protocol the required function block needs to be

instantiated in the configuration.

3.3.3.1 Functional diagrams for protection

The functional diagrams describe the IED's protection functionality in detail and
according to the factory set default connections.

The line differential protection with in-zone power transformer LNPLDF1 is intended
to be the main protection offering exclusive unit protection for the power distribution
lines or cables. The stabilized low stage can be blocked if the current transformer
failure is detected. The operate value of the instantaneous high stage can be multiplied
by predefined settings, if ENA_MULT_HS input is activated. In this configuration, it
is activated by the open status information of the remote-end circuit breaker and earth-
switch, and if the disconnector is not in the intermediate position. The intention of this
connection is to lower the setting value of the instantaneous high stage by multiplying
with the setting High Op value Mult, in case of internal fault.

Alarm LED3 informs when the line differential is not available possibly due to a
failure in protection communication, or if the function is set in a test mode.

RED615 47
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

Four non-directional overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit
protection. Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection PHIPTOC1 can be
blocked by energizing the binary input X120:BI1. The instantaneous and first high
stage are blocked by activation of line differential protection.
LNPLDF1
OR
BLOCK OPERATE LNPLDF1_OPERATE
CCSPVC1_FAIL B1 O BLOCK_LS START LNPLDF1_START
REMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL B2 ENA_MULT_HS STR_LS_LOC
STR_LS_REM
OPR_LS_LOC LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC
OPR_LS_REM LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM
OPR_HS_LOC LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC
OR OPR_HS_REM LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM
BLKD2H_LOC LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC
REMOTE_FEEDER_READY B1 O BLKD2H_REM LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM
REMOTE_CB_OPEN B2 PRO_ACTIVE LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

OR
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC B1 O LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM B2

NOT
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE IN OUT LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

OR
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC B1 O LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM B2

OR
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC B1 O LNPLDF_BLKD2H
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM B2

GUID-214BD8DC-0A09-4BD2-BF07-0AD63322734C V2 EN

Figure 17: Line differential protection functions

OR PHIPTOC1
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE B1 O BLOCK OPERATE PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING B2 ENA_MULT START PHIPTOC1_START

INRPHAR1_BLK2H

PHHPTOC1
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE BLOCK OPERATE PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHHPTOC1_START

PHHPTOC2
BLOCK OPERATE PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHHPTOC2_START

PHLPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHLPTOC1_START

OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O PHxPTOC_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4
B5
B6

GUID-1EC75CEC-F8EC-4181-9EA6-B077515E9347 V1 EN

Figure 18: Overcurrent protection functions

48 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

The upstream blocking both from the start of the instantaneous and the high stage
overcurrent protection function is connected to the binary output X110:SO1. This
output can be used to send a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protection
stage of the IED at the upstream bay.

OR6
PHIPTOC1_START B1 O UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKING
PHHPTOC1_START B2
PHHPTOC2_START B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-53A4ACB1-873E-4AA6-A478-536C7BA0E03F V1 EN

Figure 19: Upstream blocking logic

The output BLK2H of the three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 offers the
possibility to either block the function or multiply the active settings for any of the
available overcurrent function blocks.

INRPHAR1
BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H

GUID-76C18EB4-E3EC-427D-B47A-9E1BFD2DBA5E V1 EN

Figure 20: Inrush detector function

Two negative-sequence overcurrent protection stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 are

provided for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect the
feeder against phase unbalance. Both the negative-sequence overcurrent protection
functions are blocked in case of detection in failure in secondary circuit of current
transformer.

NSPTOC1
CCSPVC1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC1_START

NSPTOC2
CCSPVC1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC2_START

OR
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O NSPTOC_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2

GUID-80E6D94D-4D46-4B79-8383-3C6C3577E763 V2 EN

Figure 21: Negative-sequence overcurrent protection

RED615 49
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

The overcurrent protection and negative-sequence overcurrent

protection are used as backup protection against line differential
protection.

The backup protection operated information is available at binary output X110:SO2

which can be used for external alarm purposes.

The circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by
number of different protection functions available in the IED. The circuit breaker
failure protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuit
breaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.

The circuit breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET and
TRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker through
TRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output is used to give a backup trip to the breaker
feeding upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to the
binary output X100:PO2.

CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O START TRBU CCBRBRF1_TRBU
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 POSCLOSE TRRET CCBRBRF1_TRRET
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3 B3 CB_FAULT
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6

LNPLDF1_OPERATE
X110_BI2_EXT_CCBRBRF_START

X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
GUID-ED51D248-8DD6-45C2-8B99-8A4885023125 V1 EN

Figure 22: Circuit breaker failure protection function

The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip logics:
TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is available at
binary outputs X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are provided with
a lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal duration setting.
If the lockout operation mode is selected, binary input X120:BI4 can be assigned to
RST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external reset with a push button.

TRPPTRC1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC1_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6

LNPLDF1_OPERATE
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-8768D080-5A99-4E2D-8E01-FDD152866526 V1 EN

Figure 23: Trip logic TRPPTRC1

50 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

TRPPTRC2
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC2_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6

LNPLDF1_OPERATE
CCBRBRF1_TRRET
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-8EC8BF92-8C1B-4315-A462-6A661E013089 V1 EN

Figure 24: Trip logic TRPPTRC2

3.3.3.2 Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder

The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to trigger
the disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the disturbance
recorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the selected signals from
different functions and the few binary inputs are also connected to the disturbance
recorder.

RDRE1
LNPLDF1_START C1 TRIGGERED DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
LNPLDF1_OPERATE C2
PHIPTOC1_START C3
PHHPTOC1_START C4
PHHPTOC2_START C5
PHLPTOC1_START C6
NSPTOC1_START C7
NSPTOC2_START C8
OR6 CCBRBRF1_TRRET C9
CCBRBRF1_TRBU C10
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O C11
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 C12
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3 INRPHAR1_BLK2H C13
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4 PCSITPC1_ALARM C14
B5 LNPLDF_BLKD2H C15
B6 LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE C16
C17
C18
C19
C20
OR C21
C22
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O C23
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 C24
C25
C26
C27
X110_BI4_BINARY_TRANSFER C28
X110_BI2_EXT_CCBRBRF_START C29
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED C30
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED C31
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING C32
C33
C34
C35
C36
C37
C38
C39
C40
C41
C42
C43
C44
C45
C46
C47
C48
C49
C50
C51
C52
C53
C54
C55
C56
C57
C58
C59
C60
C61
C62
C63
C64

GUID-7A54A97D-ED30-4EF9-A3CF-F0F21EA72AAB V2 EN

Figure 25: Disturbance recorder

RED615 51
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

3.3.3.3 Functional diagrams for condition monitoring

CCSPVC1 detects failures in the current measuring circuits. When a failure is

detected, it can be used to block the current protection functions that measure the
calculated sequence component currents or residual current to avoid unnecessary
operation.

CCSPVC1
BLOCK FAIL CCSPVC1_FAIL
ALARM CCSPVC1_ALARM

GUID-3C8B9191-F624-40FF-BE4E-54B68FC6760F V2 EN

Figure 26: Current circuit supervision function

Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for power
output X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. Both functions are
blocked by the master trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker open
signal.

It is assumed that there is no external resistor in the circuit breaker

tripping coil circuit connected in parallel with the circuit breaker
normally open auxiliary contact.

Set the parameters for TCSSCBR1 properly.

TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR1_ALARM

TCSSCBR2
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR2_ALARM

OR
TCSSCBR1_ALARM B1 O TCSSCBR_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2

GUID-35D08B4E-51FC-4118-AD4C-0C046AA23550 V1 EN

Figure 27: Trip circuit supervision function

52 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B1 O TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-5EF1437A-0FC1-43BD-8BCA-4525748A3F10 V1 EN

Figure 28: Logic for blocking of trip circuit supervision

Protection communication supervision PCSITPC1 is used in the configuration to

block the operation of the line differential function. This way, the malfunction of the
line differential is prevented. The activation of binary signal transfer outputs during
protection communication failure is also blocked. These are done internally without
connections in the configurations. The protection communication supervision alarm
is connected to alarm LED 4, disturbance recorder and binary output X100:SO2.

PCSITPC1
OK
WARNING
ALARM PCSITPC1_ALARM
COMM

GUID-1C5B59EA-A7A6-4ED4-AA51-392008C46EBA V2 EN

Figure 29: Protection communication supervision

Binary signal transfer BSTGGIO1 is used for changing any binary information which
can be used for example, in protection schemes, interlocking and alarms. There are
eight separate inputs and corresponding outputs available.

In this configuration, one physical input X110:BI4 is connected to the binary signal
transfer channel one. Local feeder ready and local circuit breaker open information are
connected to the BSTGGIO inputs 6 and 7. These are interlocking information from
control logic. The information of detected current transformer fault is connected to
input 8.

As a consequence of sending interlocking information to remote end, also receiving of

same information locally is needed. Therefore, remote feeder ready, remote circuit
breaker open and remote current transformer failure are connected to the binary signal
transfer function outputs. Also the remote binary transfer output signal is connected to
the binary output X110:SO3.

BSTGGIO1
X110_BI4_BINARY_TRANSFER SEND_SIG_1 RECV_SIG_1 REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER
SEND_SIG_2 RECV_SIG_2
SEND_SIG_3 RECV_SIG_3
SEND_SIG_4 RECV_SIG_4
SEND_SIG_5 RECV_SIG_5
LOCAL_FEEDER_READY SEND_SIG_6 RECV_SIG_6 REMOTE_FEEDER_READY
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS SEND_SIG_7 RECV_SIG_7 REMOTE_CB_OPEN
CCSPVC1_FAIL SEND_SIG_8 RECV_SIG_8 REMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL
SEND_SIG_A BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_A
RECV_SIG_A BSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A

GUID-6E428F3A-5652-4573-BFEC-71E5893CE434 V2 EN

Figure 30: Binary signal transfer

RED615 53
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

3.3.3.4 Functional diagrams for control and interlocking

Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.
DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 and
ESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in the
standard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing switch
status information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.

DCSXSWI1
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST POSOPEN OPENPOS
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS DCSXSWI1_OKPOS

GUID-42D1B156-F8DC-47AE-8B49-689E1A4F9930 V1 EN

Figure 31: Disconnector 1 control logic

ESSXSWI1
X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED POSOPEN OPENPOS ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS

GUID-1FCBEC78-041D-49E7-8440-F24B71B0979E V1 EN

Figure 32: Earth-switch 1 control logic

The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated. The
input can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of the
disconnector or circuit breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of the trip
logics and remote feeder position indication. Master trip logic, disconnector and
earth-switch statuses are local feeder ready information to be sent for the remote end.

The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or circuit breaker
truck is either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This output,
together with the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-
enable signal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for the
circuit breaker is always enabled.

If REMOTE_FEEDER_READY information is missing, for

example, in case of protection communication not connected, it
disables the circuit breaker closing in the local IED.

CBXCBR1
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN SELECTED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE EXE_OP CBXCBR1_EXE_OP
TRUE ENA_OPEN EXE_CL CBXCBR1_EXE_CL
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE ENA_CLOSE OP_REQ
FALSE BLK_OPEN CL_REQ
BLK_CLOSE OPENPOS CBXCBR1_OPENPOS
CBXCBR1_AU_OPEN AU_OPEN CLOSEPOS
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE AU_CLOSE OKPOS
TRIP OPEN_ENAD
SYNC_OK CLOSE_ENAD
SYNC_ITL_BYP

GUID-0644C4E5-EBFA-477B-90B0-7D22E168972A V2 EN

Figure 33: Circuit breaker 1 control logic

54 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

Any additional signals required by the application can be connected

for opening and closing of circuit breaker.

OR
CBXCBR1_EXE_CL B1 O CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
B2

GUID-31AF7051-A62F-4596-B317-36090DEE3235 V1 EN

Figure 34: Signals for closing coil of circuit breaker 1

OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B1 O CB_OPEN_COMMAND
CBXCBR1_EXE_OP B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-444B84F9-F5D9-4BA4-9EDC-344CD77F0ED7 V1 EN

Figure 35: Signals for opening coil of circuit breaker 1

AND
REMOTE_FEEDER_READY B1 O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
LOCAL_FEEDER_READY B2

AND6
DCSXSWI1_OKPOS B1 O LOCAL_FEEDER_READY
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS B2
B3
B4
NOT B5
B6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP IN OUT

NOT
TRPPTRC2_TRIP IN OUT

GUID-48415567-5620-4D8C-BEDE-545846CBAB67 V1 EN

Figure 36: Circuit breaker 1 close enable logic

The configuration includes logic for generating circuit breaker external closing and
opening command with the IED in local or remote mode.

Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command and
modify it according to the application.

Connect the additional signals for closing and opening of the circuit
breaker in local or remote mode, if applicable for the application.

RED615 55
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2

GUID-546ECBD3-B766-45AF-9FF5-948DCA545C6F V1 EN

Figure 37: External closing command for circuit breaker 1

AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2

GUID-361E5BC0-42E9-49D8-ABCE-8677BFA017A1 V1 EN

Figure 38: External opening command for circuit breaker 1

3.3.3.5 Functional diagrams for measurement functions

The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase current
measurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card in
the back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the sequence
current.

The measurements can be seen in the LHMI and they are available by using the
measurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks can
generate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the measured
current values.

The load profile record function LDPRLRC1 is included in the measurements sheet.
LDPRLRC1 offers the ability to observe the loading history of the corresponding
feeder.

CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM

GUID-8B4CEF31-8A1D-40B8-9FCB-E9D2905CA6D5 V1 EN

Figure 39: Current measurement: Three-phase current measurement

CSMSQI1

GUID-60EF9EC2-4E85-4236-A57D-4D663A2B340A V1 EN

Figure 40: Current measurement: Sequence current measurement

56 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

FLTRFRC1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD

GUID-7680B583-F7CC-4C51-B4F4-07071AA72925 V2 EN

Figure 41: Other measurement: Data monitoring

LDPRLRC1
RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM

GUID-D1F501B2-6430-4E72-A889-3B5838D45918 V2 EN

Figure 42: Other measurement: Load profile record

3.3.3.6 Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs

X110_BI2_EXT_CCBRBRF_START
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2

X110_BI3_SG_CHANGE
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3

X110_BI4_BINARY_TRANSFER
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4

X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5

X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6

X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7

X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8
GUID-5FB90F71-13E8-4A40-8F9E-EB5131350578 V1 EN

Figure 43: Binary inputs - X110 terminal block

X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 1

X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 2

X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 3

X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 4
GUID-02B39637-DED0-4D63-A9FE-A4FB30994B9E V1 EN

Figure 44: Binary inputs - X120 terminal block

RED615 57
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKING
X110 (BIO).X110-SO1

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO2

REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER
X110 (BIO).X110-SO3
GUID-65B379D4-FE8D-45EC-8ACF-933E37B249F5 V1 EN

Figure 45: Binary outputs - X110 terminal block

CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1

CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2

DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1

LNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2

CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3

TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
GUID-1D17D025-275D-47B2-90D0-F95635D6CEFD V1 EN

Figure 46: Binary outputs - X100 terminal block

58 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

LED1
OK
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE ALARM
RESET

LED2
OK
LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE ALARM
RESET

LED3
OK
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE ALARM
RESET

LED4
OK
PCSITPC1_ALARM ALARM
RESET

LED5
OK
CCSPVC1_ALARM ALARM
RESET

GUID-DAF8EA20-89B5-48D6-B6E7-5B844BFD7A7B V2 EN

RED615 59
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

LED6
OK
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE ALARM
RESET

LED7
OK
CCBRBRF1_TRBU ALARM
RESET

LED8
OK
DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED ALARM
RESET

LED9
OK
TCSSCBR_ALARM ALARM
RESET

LED10
OK
BSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A ALARM
RESET

LED11
OK
BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_A ALARM
RESET

GUID-8A7C2989-86B4-40D7-871F-4AFCB28E598D V2 EN

Figure 47: Default LED connection

3.3.3.7 Functional diagrams for other timer logics

The configuration also includes line differential operate, inactive communication and
backup protection operate logic. The operate logics are connected to the minimum
pulse timer TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The
output from TPGAPC1 is connected to the binary outputs.
OR
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE B1 O
LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE B2 TPGAPC1
IN1 OUT1 DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSE
IN2 OUT2 LNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM

OR
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE B1 O
PCSITPC1_ALARM B2

GUID-F96BFC4E-C609-4176-901A-5B9EEC2CFAA9 V2 EN

Figure 48: Timer logic for differential operate and communication not active

60 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

TPGAPC2
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE IN1 OUT1 BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE
IN2 OUT2

OR
PHxPTOC_OPERATE B1 O BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE
NSPTOC_OPERATE B2

GUID-CB98021B-214D-4A49-816D-91CDE2D603C1 V1 EN

Figure 49: Timer logic for backup protection operate pulse

3.3.3.8 Other functions

The configuration includes few instances of multipurpose protection MAPGAPC,

high impedance fault detection PHIZ, runtime counter for machines and devices
MDSOPT and few instances of different types of timers and control functions. These
functions are not included in application configuration but they can be added based on
the system requirements.

3.4 Standard configuration B

3.4.1 Applications
The standard configuration for line current differential protection including
directional earth-fault protection and autoreclosing is mainly intended for cable feeder
applications in the distribution networks. The standard configuration for line current
differential protection includes support for in-zone transformers. The configuration
also includes additional options for selecting earth-fault protection based on
admittance, wattmetric or harmonic principles.

The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with default
settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing and internal
signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be further adapted to
different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs by modifying the
internal functionality using PCM600.

RED615 61
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

3.4.2 Functions
Uo

RED615 LINE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION AND CONTROL RELAY

With in-zone power transformer support
STANDARD
CONFIGURATION
B

PROTECTION LOCAL HMI ALSO AVAILABLE

- Binary Signal Transfer function (BST)

2 - Disturbance and fault recorder
Master Trip
- Event log and recorded data
Conguration A
System

Lockout relay
HMI
Time
Authorization

- Local/Remote push button on LHMI

94/86 I ESC Clear
- Self-supervision
- Time synchronization: IEEE 1588 v2,
A
O R
L
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr SNTP, IRIG-B
- User management
IL2 0 A

2 - Web HMI
I2> I2/I1> 3Ith>F I
AND
ESC Clear

3I 46 46PD 49F
O R
L
OR

3Ith>T/G/C 3I>>>
49T/G/C 50P/51P
CONDITION MONITORING COMMUNICATION
AND SUPERVISION
Protocols:
3I>/Io>BF 3I>
IEC 61850-8-1
51BF/51NBF 51P-1
Modbus
IEC 60870-5-103
2 DNP3
3I>> 3I2f> 3dI>L CBCM MCS 3I OPTS Interfaces:
51P-2 68 87L CBCM MCS 3I OPTM Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC)
Serial: Serial glass ber (ST),
RS-485, RS-232
Io Redundant protocols:
2 HSR
BST PCS TCS PRP
BST PCS TCM RSTP
Io

Io CONTROL AND INDICATION 1) MEASUREMENT

Io>> PHIZ
51N-2 HIZ - I, Io, Uo
Object Ctrl 2) Ind 3)
- Limit value supervision
CB 1 - - Load prole record
- Symmetrical components
DC 2 3
Uo 2
Io> Io>> Io>IEF ES 1 2
67N-1 67N-2 67NIEF Analog interface types 1)
1)
Check availability of binary inputs/outputs
from technical documentation Current transformer 4
3 3
2)
Control and indication function for
Yo> Po> Io>HA primary object Voltage transformer 1
3)
Status indication function for
21YN 32N 51NHA primary object
1)
Conventional transformer inputs
OR OR

3 18
Uo> MAP SOTF OI
59G MAP SOTF 79

REMARKS
Optional 3 No. of Calculated OR Alternative
function instances value function to be
Io/Uo dened when
3I ordering

RED615
AT REMOTE
END

GUID-6AB801FF-A43F-40D6-8D70-D27EF2F402B0 V2 EN

Figure 50: Functionality overview for standard configuration B

3.4.2.1 Default I/O connections

Connector pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physical
connections section.

62 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

Table 16: Default connections for binary inputs

Binary input Description
X110-BI1 Lockout reset
X110-BI2 Binary signal transfer input
X110-BI3 Circuit breaker low gas pressure alarm
X110-BI4 Circuit breaker spring charged indication
X110-BI5 Circuit breaker truck in (service position) indication
X110-BI6 Circuit breaker truck out (service position) indication
X110-BI7 Earthing switch closed indication
X110-BI8 Earthing switch open indication
X120-BI1 Blocking input for general use
X120-BI2 Circuit breaker close
X120-BI3 Circuit breaker open

Table 17: Default connections for binary outputs

Binary input Description
X100-PO1 Close circuit breaker
X100-PO2 Breaker failure backup trip to upstream breaker
X100-SO1 Line differential protection trip alarm
X100-SO2 Protection communication failure or differential protection not available
X100-PO3 Open circuit breaker/trip 1
X100-PO4 Open circuit breaker/trip 2
X110- SO1 Upstream overcurrent blocking
X110- SO2 Backup protection operated
X110- SO3 Binary transfer signal

Table 18: Default connections for LEDs

LED Description
1 Line differential protection biased stage operate
2 Line differential protection instantaneous stage operate
3 Line differential protection is not available
4 Protection communication failure
5 Autoreclose in progress
6 Backup protection operated
7 Circuit breaker failure protection - backup trip operate
8 Disturbance recorder triggered
9 Current transformer failure or trip circuit or circuit breaker supervision
10 Binary signal transfer receive
11 Binary signal transfer send

RED615 63
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

3.4.2.2 Default disturbance recorder settings

Table 19: Default disturbance recorder analog channels

Channel Description
1 IL1
2 IL2
3 IL3
4 Io
5 Uo
6 -
7 -
8 -
9 -
10 -
11 -
12 -

Table 20: Default disturbance recorder binary channels

Channel ID text Level trigger mode
1 LNPLDF1 - start Positive or Rising
2 LNPLDF1 - operate Positive or Rising
3 PHIPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
4 PHHPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
5 PHHPTOC2 - start Positive or Rising
6 PHLPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
7 T1PTTR1 - start Positive or Rising
8 T2PTTR1 - start Positive or Rising
9 PDNSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
10 NSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
11 NSPTOC2 - start Positive or Rising
12 EFHPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
13 DEFLPDEF1 - start Positive or Rising
WPWDE1 - start
EFPADM1 - start
14 DEFLPDEF2 - start Positive or Rising
WPWDE2 - start
EFPADM2 - start
Table continues on next page

64 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

Channel ID text Level trigger mode

15 DEFLPDEF3 - start Positive or Rising
WPWDE3 - start
EFPADM3 - start
16 ROVPTOV1 - start Positive or Rising
17 ROVPTOV2 - start Positive or Rising
18 ROVPTOV3 - start Positive or Rising
19 INTRPTEF1 - start Positive or Rising
20 CCBRBRF1 - trret Level trigger off
21 CCBRBRF1 - trbu Level trigger off
22 LNPLDF1 - rstd2h Level trigger off
23 LNPLDF1 - prot not active Level trigger off
24 PHIPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
PHHPTOC1 - operate
PHHPTOC2 - operate
PHLPTOC1 - operate
25 NSPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
NSPTOC2 - operate
26 DEFLPDEF1 - operate Level trigger off
WPWDE1 - operate
EFPADM1 - operate
DEFLPDEF2 - operate
WPWDE2 - operate
EFPADM2 - operate
DEFLPDEF3 - operate
WPWDE3 - operate
EFPADM3 - operate
27 ROVPTOV1 - operate Level trigger off
ROVPTOV2 - operate
ROVPTOV3 - operate
28 PDNSPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
29 T1PTTR1 - operate Level trigger off
T2PTTR2 - operate
30 T1PTTR1 - alarm Level trigger off
31 T2PTTR2 - alarm Level trigger off
32 INRPHAR1 - blk2h Level trigger off
33 PCSITPC1 - alarm Level trigger off
34 CCSPVC1 - alarm Level trigger off
35 X110BI4 - CB spring charged Level trigger off
36 X110BI3 - gas pressure alarm Level trigger off
Table continues on next page

RED615 65
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

Channel ID text Level trigger mode

37 X120BI3 - CB opened Level trigger off
38 X120BI2 - CB closed Level trigger off
39 X120BI1 - ext OC blocking Level trigger off
40 DARREC1 - unsuc recl Level trigger off
DARREC1 - close CB
41 DARREC1 - inpro Level trigger off

3.4.3 Functional diagrams

The functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and function-
to-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed with
PCM600 according to the application requirements.

The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside the
IEDs standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels available for the
disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbance
recorders parameter settings.

The phase currents to the IED are fed from a current transformer. The residual current
to the IED is fed from either residually connected CTs, an external core balance CT,
neutral CT or internally calculated.

The residual voltage to the IED is fed from either residually connected VTs or an open
delta connected VT.

The IED offers six different settings group which can be set based on individual needs.
Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting group settings available
in the IED or via binary input.

Depending on the communication protocol the required function block needs to be

instantiated in the configuration.

3.4.3.1 Functional diagrams for protection

The functional diagrams describe the IED's protection functionality in detail and
according to the factory set default connections.

Line differential protection with in-zone power transformer LNPLDF1 is intended to

be the main protection offering exclusive unit protection for the power distribution
lines or cables. The stabilized low stage can be blocked if the current transformer
failure is detected. The operate value of the instantaneous high stage can be multiplied
by predefined settings if the ENA_MULT_HS input is activated. In this configuration,
the input is activated by the open status information of the remote-end circuit breaker
and earth-switch, and if the disconnector is not in the intermediate state. The intention
of this connection is to lower the setting value of the instantaneous high stage by
multiplying with setting High Op value Mult, in case of internal fault.

66 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

Alarm LED3 informs when the line differential is not available possibly due to a
failure in protection communication, or if the function is set in a test mode.

Four non-directional overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit
protection. The three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection, instantaneous
stage PHIPTOC1 can be blocked by energizing the binary input X120: BI1. The
instantaneous and first high stage are blocked by activation of line differential
protection.
LNPLDF1
OR
BLOCK OPERATE LNPLDF1_OPERATE
CCSPVC1_FAIL B1 O BLOCK_LS START LNPLDF1_START
REMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL B2 ENA_MULT_HS STR_LS_LOC
STR_LS_REM
OPR_LS_LOC LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC
OPR_LS_REM LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM
OPR_HS_LOC LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC
OR OPR_HS_REM LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM
BLKD2H_LOC LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC
REMOTE_FEEDER_READY B1 O BLKD2H_REM LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM
REMOTE_CB_OPEN B2 PRO_ACTIVE LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

OR
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC B1 O LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM B2

NOT
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE IN OUT LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

OR
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC B1 O LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM B2

OR
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC B1 O LNPLDF_BLKD2H
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM B2

GUID-AD84AF5C-400B-41C3-91D6-949E65CAA3AF V2 EN

Figure 51: Line differential protection functions

RED615 67
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

OR PHIPTOC1
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE B1 O BLOCK OPERATE PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING B2 ENA_MULT START PHIPTOC1_START

INRPHAR1_BLK2H

PHHPTOC1
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE BLOCK OPERATE PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHHPTOC1_START

PHHPTOC2
BLOCK OPERATE PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHHPTOC2_START

PHLPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHLPTOC1_START

OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O PHxPTOC_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4
B5
B6

GUID-548C92CC-518C-48A8-B87B-EED122805E8C V1 EN

Figure 52: Overcurrent protection functions

The upstream blocking both from the start of the instantaneous as well as the high
stage overcurrent protection function is connected to the binary output X110:SO1.
This output can be used to send a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protection
stage of the IED at the upstream bay.

OR6
PHIPTOC1_START B1 O UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKING
PHHPTOC1_START B2
PHHPTOC2_START B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-4B78CBAB-A4CD-4E1D-A881-CB07EB4B9E98 V1 EN

Figure 53: Upstream blocking logic

Three stages are provided for directional earth-fault protection. According to the order
code, the directional earth-fault protection method can be based on conventional
directional earth-fault protection DEFxPDEF only or alternatively together with
admittance-based earth-fault protection EFPADM or wattmetric-based earth-fault
protection WPWDE or harmonics-based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC. In
addition, there is a dedicated protection stage INTRPTEF either for transient-based
earth-fault protection or for cable intermittent earth-fault protection in compensated
networks.

68 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

DEFHPDEF1
BLOCK OPERATE DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFHPDEF1_START
RCA_CTL

DEFLPDEF1
BLOCK OPERATE DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFLPDEF1_START
RCA_CTL

DEFLPDEF2
BLOCK OPERATE DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFLPDEF2_START
RCA_CTL

OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O DEFxPDEF_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-7CE4340B-32CA-4C2A-BD23-B658F983AC26 V1 EN

Figure 54: Directional earth-fault protection

INTRPTEF1
BLOCK OPERATE INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
START INTRPTEF1_START
BLK_EF

GUID-0F6D8EB0-A3F2-4998-8606-5B437F3B1FF6 V1 EN

Figure 55: Transient or intermittent earth-fault protection function

RED615 69
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

WPWDE1
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE1_OPERATE
RCA_CTL START WPWDE1_START

WPWDE2
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE2_OPERATE
RCA_CTL START WPWDE2_START

WPWDE3
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE3_OPERATE
RCA_CTL START WPWDE3_START

OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O WPWDE_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-3C742FD7-5543-44A2-8067-FE696CEA8382 V1 EN

Figure 56: Wattmetric protection

EFPADM1
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM1_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM1_START

EFPADM2
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM2_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM2_START

EFPADM3
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM3_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM3_START

OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE B1 O EFPADM_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2
EFPADM3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-7BF18144-47E9-4893-9483-3FAEF7305665 V1 EN

Figure 57: Admittance-based earth-fault protection function

70 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

Non-directional earth-fault protection EFHPTOC protects against double earth-fault

situations in isolated or compensated networks.

EFHPTOC1
CCSPVC1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFHPTOC1_START

GUID-1940E3D0-47D5-43EE-83A8-D168E00149B9 V2 EN

Figure 58: Cross-country earth-fault protection

The output BLK2H of three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 offers the possibility to
either block the function or multiply the active settings for any of the available
overcurrent function blocks.

INRPHAR1
BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H

GUID-692057DE-53FB-46D9-89A7-F1EFF039261B V1 EN

Figure 59: Inrush detector function

Two negative-sequence overcurrent protection stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 are

provided for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect the
feeder against phase unbalance. The negative-sequence overcurrent protection
functions are blocked in case of detection in failure in secondary circuit of current
transformer.

NSPTOC1
CCSPVC1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC1_START

NSPTOC2
CCSPVC1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC2_START

OR
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O NSPTOC_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2

GUID-10D0C21D-0607-411C-82D7-8F610AD9A94D V2 EN

Figure 60: Negative sequence overcurrent protection function

The phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 protects for interruptions in the

normal three-phase load supply, for example, in downed conductor situations. The
function is blocked in case of detection in failure in secondary circuit of current
transformer.

RED615 71
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

PDNSPTOC1
CCSPVC1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
START PDNSPTOC1_START

GUID-2B586B9A-9BB7-40F7-81CD-5F3DF685AA47 V2 EN

Figure 61: Phase discontinuity protection

Two three-phase thermal protection functions are incorporated, one with one time
constant T1PTTR1 and other with two time constants T2PTTR1 for detecting
overloads under varying load conditions. The BLK_CLOSE output of the function is
used to block the closing operation of circuit breaker.

T1PTTR1
BLK_OPR OPERATE T1PTTR1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START T1PTTR1_START
TEMP_AMB ALARM T1PTTR1_ALARM
BLK_CLOSE T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

T2PTTR1
BLOCK OPERATE T2PTTR1_OPERATE
TEMP_AMB START T2PTTR1_START
ALARM T2PTTR1_ALARM
BLK_CLOSE T2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

GUID-FF27FA66-67F0-4C88-9082-B40763180076 V1 EN

Figure 62: Thermal overcurrent protection function

The residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV provides earth-fault protection by

detecting an abnormal level of residual voltage. It can be used, for example, as a
nonselective backup protection for the selective directional earth-fault functionality.

72 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

ROVPTOV1
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV1_START

ROVPTOV2
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV2_START

ROVPTOV3
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV3_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV3_START

OR6
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O ROVPTOV_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-C3B58F13-0F77-423E-9130-33D80079CD37 V1 EN

Figure 63: Residual voltage protection function

It should be noted that overcurrent protection, negative sequence overcurrent

protection, phase discontinuity, earth-fault protection and residual overvoltage
protections are all used as backup protection against line differential protection. The
backup protection operated information is available at binary output X110:SO2 which
can be used for external alarm purpose.

The optional autoreclosing function is configured to be initiated by operate signals

from a number of protection stages through the INIT_1...5 inputs. It is possible to
create individual autoreclose sequences for each input.

The autoreclosing function can be inhibited with the INHIBIT_RECL input. By

default, few selected protection function operations are connected to this input. A
control command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks the
autoreclosing function via the CBXCBR1-SELECTED signal.

The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosing sequence is expressed with the
CB_READY input in DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are connected
to the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open command from
the autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3, whereas close
command is connected directly to binary output X100:PO1.

RED615 73
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

DARREC1
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE INIT_1 OPEN_CB DARREC1_OPEN_CB
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_2 CLOSE_CB DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
OR6 PHHPTOC2_OPERATE INIT_3 CMD_WAIT
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_4 INPRO DARREC1_INPRO
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O INIT_5 LOCKED
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2 INIT_6 PROT_CRD
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3 DEL_INIT_2 UNSUC_RECL DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
B4 DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
B5 DEL_INIT_4 READY
B6 BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED CB_POS
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED CB_READY
INC_SHOTP
OR6 INHIBIT_RECL
RECL_ON
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O SYNC
EFPADM3_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

OR6
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B5
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM B6

GUID-1002F280-77C3-4183-9D8C-C1A9491EA948 V1 EN

Figure 64: Autoreclosing function

Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by a
number of different protection functions available in the IED. The circuit breaker
failure protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuit
breaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.

The circuit breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET and
TRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker through
TRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output is used to give a backup trip to the breaker
feeding upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to the
binary output X100:PO2.

CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O START TRBU CCBRBRF1_TRBU
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 POSCLOSE TRRET CCBRBRF1_TRRET
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3 B3 CB_FAULT
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6

OR6
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B1 O
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B3
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B4
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B5
LNPLDF1_OPERATE B6

OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6

EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_OPERATE

X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
GUID-FEC1A53B-56F4-47AB-93E0-9E6E8BD69CEF V1 EN

Figure 65: Circuit breaker failure protection function

74 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip logics:
TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is available at
binary output X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are provided with a
lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal duration setting. If
the lockout operation mode is selected, binary input X110:BI1 can be assigned to
RST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external reset with a push button.

TRPPTRC1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC1_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6

OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6

OR6
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B1 O
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6

OR6
LNPLDF1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE1_OPERATE B2
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3
WPWDE3_OPERATE B4
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B5
T2PTTR1_OPERATE B6

X110_BI1_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-314936ED-1932-452F-AD19-785984517B0B V1 EN

Figure 66: Trip logic TRPPTRC1

RED615 75
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

TRPPTRC2
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC2_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6

OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6

OR6
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B1 O
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6

OR6
LNPLDF1_OPERATE B1 O
CCBRBRF1_TRRET B2
WPWDE1_OPERATE B3
WPWDE2_OPERATE B4
WPWDE3_OPERATE B5
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B6

T2PTTR1_OPERATE
X110_BI1_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-30C131EA-7088-46A1-B58F-8F138563EA94 V1 EN

Figure 67: Trip logic TRPPTRC2

3.4.3.2 Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder

The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to trigger
the disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the disturbance
recorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the selected signals from
different functions and the few binary inputs are also connected to the disturbance
recorder.

76 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

OR6 RDRE1
DEFLPDEF1_START B1 O LNPLDF1_START C1 TRIGGERED DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
WPWDE1_START B2 LNPLDF1_OPERATE C2
EFPADM1_START B3 PHIPTOC1_START C3
B4 PHHPTOC1_START C4
B5 PHHPTOC2_START C5
B6 PHLPTOC1_START C6
T1PTTR1_START C7
T2PTTR1_START C8
PDNSPTOC1_START C9
NSPTOC1_START C10
OR6 NSPTOC2_START C11
EFHPTOC1_START C12
DEFLPDEF2_START B1 O C13
WPWDE2_START B2 C14
EFPADM2_START B3 C15
B4 ROVPTOV1_START C16
B5 ROVPTOV2_START C17
B6 ROVPTOV3_START C18
INTRPTEF1_START C19
CCBRBRF1_TRRET C20
CCBRBRF1_TRBU C21
OR6 LNPLDF_BLKD2H C22
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE C23
DEFHPDEF1_START B1 O C24
WPWDE3_START B2 C25
EFPADM3_START B3 C26
B4 C27
B5 PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE C28
B6 C29
T1PTTR1_ALARM C30
OR6 T2PTTR1_ALARM C31
INRPHAR1_BLK2H C32
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O PCSITPC1_ALARM C33
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 CCSPVC1_ALARM C34
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3 X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED C35
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4 X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM C36
B5 OR X120_BI3_CB_OPENED C37
B6 X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED C38
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING C39
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 C40
DARREC1_INPRO C41
C42
OR6 C43
C44
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O C45
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2 OR6 C46
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3 C47
B4 B1 O C48
B5 DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2 C49
B6 DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3 C50
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B4 C51
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B5 C52
B6 C53
C54
OR6 C55
C56
EFPADM1_OPERATE B1 O C57
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2 OR6 C58
EFPADM3_OPERATE B3 C59
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B4 ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O C60
B5 ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2 C61
B6 ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3 C62
B4 C63
B5 C64
B6
OR
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B1 O
T2PTTR1_OPERATE B2

OR
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL B1 O
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2

GUID-268B3D85-D897-488A-9B7F-8494B63DCF50 V2 EN

Figure 68: Disturbance recorder

3.4.3.3 Functional diagrams for condition monitoring

CCSPVC1 detects failure in the current measuring circuits. When a failure is detected,
it can be used to block current protection functions that measure calculated sequence
component currents or residual current to avoid unnecessary operation.

CCSPVC1
BLOCK FAIL CCSPVC1_FAIL
ALARM CCSPVC1_ALARM

GUID-5078A248-6EC5-4061-AE60-1AD139C07EFC V2 EN

Figure 69: Current circuit supervision function

Circuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR1 supervises the switch status based on

the connected binary input information and the measured current levels. SSCBR1
introduces various supervision methods.

Set parameters for SSCBR1 properly.

RED615 77
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

SSCBR1
BLOCK TRV_T_OP_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN TRV_T_CL_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE SPR_CHR_ALM SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM
CB_OPEN_COMMAND OPEN_CB_EXE OPR_ALM SSCBR1_OPR_ALM
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND CLOSE_CB_EXE OPR_LO SSCBR1_OPR_LO
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM PRES_ALM_IN IPOW_ALM SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM
PRES_LO_IN IPOW_LO SSCBR1_IPOW_LO
CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED SPR_CHR_ST CB_LIFE_ALM SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED SPR_CHR MON_ALM SSCBR1_MON_ALM
RST_IPOW PRES_ALM SSCBR1_PRES_ALM
RST_CB_WEAR PRES_LO SSCBR1_PRES_LO
RST_TRV_T OPENPOS
RST_SPR_T INVALIDPOS
CLOSEPOS

GUID-C245CA67-6353-4AC0-B004-FF962F2DE242 V1 EN

Figure 70: Circuit-breaker condition monitoring function

OR6
SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM B1 O
SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM B2
SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM B3
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM B4 OR
SSCBR1_OPR_LO B5
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM B6 B1 O SSCBR1_ALARMS
B2

OR6
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO B1 O
SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM B2
SSCBR1_MON_ALM B3
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM B4
SSCBR1_PRES_LO B5
B6

GUID-5B9CD6B2-864D-446E-AF08-FB69DB807E65 V1 EN

Figure 71: Logic for circuit breaker monitoring alarm

NOT
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED IN OUT CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED

GUID-55A52E9F-8B13-49D9-8882-756A5476E72E V1 EN

Figure 72: Logic for start of circuit breaker spring charging

Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for power
output X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. The functions are
blocked by the master trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker open
signal.

It is assumed that there is no external resistor in the circuit breaker

tripping coil circuit connected in parallel with the circuit breaker
normally open auxiliary contact.

Set parameters for TCSSCBR1 properly.

78 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR1_ALARM

TCSSCBR2
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR2_ALARM

OR
TCSSCBR1_ALARM B1 O TCSSCBR_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2

GUID-DECD965E-2872-41A6-B046-BAC70B2833C7 V1 EN

Figure 73: Trip circuit supervision function

OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B1 O TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-DC549599-4B1C-494B-BB34-F56026644379 V1 EN

Figure 74: Logic for blocking of trip circuit supervision

Protection communication supervision PCSITPC1 is used in the configuration to

block the operation of the line differential function. This way, the malfunction of the
line differential is prevented. The activation of binary signal transfer outputs during
protection communication failure also blocked. These are done internally without
connections in the configurations. The protection communication supervision alarm
is connected to the alarm LED 4, disturbance recorder and binary output X100:SO2.

PCSITPC1
OK
WARNING
ALARM PCSITPC1_ALARM
COMM

GUID-BAE83A0F-1C32-43F4-B77B-B7EE8CDBFCE8 V2 EN

Figure 75: Protection communication supervision function

The binary signal transfer function BSTGGIO1 is used for changing any binary
information which can be used for example, in protection schemes, interlocking and
alarms. There are eight separate inputs and corresponding outputs available.

In this configuration, one physical input X110:BI2 is connected to the binary signal
transfer channel one. Local feeder ready and local circuit breaker open information are
connected to the BSTGGIO1 inputs 6 and 7. These are interlocking information from
control logic. The information of detected current transformer fault is connected to the
input 8.

RED615 79
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

As a consequence of sending interlocking information to remote end, also receiving of

same information locally is needed. Therefore, remote feeder ready, remote circuit
breaker open and remote current transformer failure are connected to the binary signal
transfer function outputs. Also the remote binary transfer output signal is connected to
the binary output X110:SO3.

BSTGGIO1
X110_BI2_BINARY_TRANSFER SEND_SIG_1 RECV_SIG_1 REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER
SEND_SIG_2 RECV_SIG_2
SEND_SIG_3 RECV_SIG_3
SEND_SIG_4 RECV_SIG_4
SEND_SIG_5 RECV_SIG_5
LOCAL_FEEDER_READY SEND_SIG_6 RECV_SIG_6 REMOTE_FEEDER_READY
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS SEND_SIG_7 RECV_SIG_7 REMOTE_CB_OPEN
CCSPVC1_FAIL SEND_SIG_8 RECV_SIG_8 REMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL
SEND_SIG_A BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_A
RECV_SIG_A BSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A

GUID-4AEBA6EE-A7A7-420D-81C4-332109FA18D2 V2 EN

Figure 76: Binary signal transfer function

3.4.3.4 Functional diagrams for control and interlocking

Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.
DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 and
ESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in the
standard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing switch
status information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.

DCSXSWI1
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST POSOPEN OPENPOS
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS DCSXSWI1_OKPOS

GUID-F19F7A81-7B9B-412C-BC89-B389307012A5 V1 EN

Figure 77: Disconnector 1 control logic

ESSXSWI1
X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED POSOPEN OPENPOS ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS

GUID-0496B254-C7CF-420D-86DD-E625012BF389 V1 EN

Figure 78: Earth-switch 1 control logic

The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated. The
input can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of the
disconnector or circuit breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of the trip
logics and remote feeder position indication. Master trip logic, disconnector and
earth-switch statuses are local feeder ready information to be sent for the remote end.

The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines whether the disconnector or circuit
breaker truck is either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This output,
together with the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-
enable signal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for the
circuit breaker is always enabled.

80 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

If REMOTE_FEEDER_READY information is missing, for

example, in case of protection communication not connected, it
disables the breaker closing in the local IED.

Any additional signals required by the application can be connected

for opening and closing of circuit breaker.

CBXCBR1
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN SELECTED CBXCBR1_SELECTED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE EXE_OP CBXCBR1_EXE_OP
TRUE ENA_OPEN EXE_CL CBXCBR1_EXE_CL
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE ENA_CLOSE OP_REQ
FALSE BLK_OPEN CL_REQ
CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE BLK_CLOSE OPENPOS CBXCBR1_OPENPOS
CBXCBR1_AU_OPEN AU_OPEN CLOSEPOS
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE AU_CLOSE OKPOS
TRIP OPEN_ENAD
SYNC_OK CLOSE_ENAD
SYNC_ITL_BYP

GUID-96E28E0A-0306-450B-8B90-2923AC1F47B5 V2 EN

Figure 79: Circuit breaker 1 control logic

OR
CBXCBR1_EXE_CL B1 O CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2

GUID-8A675478-7A5A-496D-A943-0EA4BACA6900 V1 EN

Figure 80: Signals for closing coil of circuit breaker 1

GUID-AE6AFF59-FED2-40E5-BDD0-48ED49F694FF V1 EN

Figure 81: Signals for opening coil of circuit breaker 1

RED615 81
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

AND
REMOTE_FEEDER_READY B1 O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
LOCAL_FEEDER_READY B2

AND6
DCSXSWI1_OKPOS B1 O LOCAL_FEEDER_READY
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS B2
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED B3
B4
NOT B5
B6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP IN OUT

NOT
TRPPTRC2_TRIP IN OUT

NOT
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM IN OUT

GUID-70637FEC-196D-40FB-950B-EA9698FD2121 V1 EN

Figure 82: Circuit breaker 1 close enable logic

Connect higher-priority conditions before enabling the circuit

breaker. These conditions cannot be bypassed with bypass feature of
the function.

OR6
T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE B1 O CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE
T2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-84F804B6-C264-4302-9A95-2E3F49094559 V1 EN

Figure 83: Circuit breaker 1 close blocking logic

The configuration includes logic for generating circuit breaker external closing and
opening command with the IED in local or remote mode.

Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command and
modify it according to the application.

Connect the additional signals for closing and opening of the circuit
breaker in local or remote mode, if applicable for the application.

AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2

GUID-8D2F88B3-A27B-4E69-A02E-D52176525437 V1 EN

Figure 84: External closing command for circuit breaker 1

82 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2

GUID-5C8FB700-8CA1-49AB-A7B4-D6FA09B5EDF2 V1 EN

Figure 85: External opening command for circuit breaker 1

3.4.3.5 Functional diagrams for measurement functions

The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase current
measurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card in
the back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the sequence
current and the residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures the residual
current.

The residual voltage input is connected to the X120 card in the back panel and is
measured by the residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1.

The measurements can be seen in the LHMI and they are available under the
measurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks can
generate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the measured
current values.

Load profile record LDPRLRC1 is included in the measurements sheet. LDPRLRC1

offers the ability to observe the loading history of the corresponding feeder.

CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM

GUID-9F56B67F-3575-4B74-8AA5-3E21C345A348 V1 EN

Figure 86: Current measurement: Three-phase current measurement

CSMSQI1

GUID-5D25FB19-03A1-4219-9646-46D3EB75497F V1 EN

Figure 87: Current measurement: Sequence current measurement

RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN

GUID-D7D2CA02-D35D-4A2E-B58A-4DBC24284EF3 V1 EN

Figure 88: Current measurement: Residual current measurement

RED615 83
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

RESVMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN

GUID-302309FA-D627-4EB9-A5AF-3C5C3DACBB6F V1 EN

Figure 89: Voltage measurement: Residual voltage measurement

FLTRFRC1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD

GUID-3E9B8AE8-FAF5-47CA-BB9F-F8156E3C78C6 V2 EN

Figure 90: Other measurement: Data monitoring

LDPRLRC1
RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM

GUID-D112C16E-7F50-4D49-960A-D38864F4724D V2 EN

Figure 91: Other measurement: Load profile record

3.4.3.6 Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs

X110_BI1_RST_LOCKOUT
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 1

X110_BI2_BINARY_TRANSFER
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2

X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3

X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4

X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5

X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6

X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7

X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8
GUID-C41ADC88-88C5-4472-A2A2-8786CCF6F829 V1 EN

Figure 92: Binary inputs - X110 terminal block

84 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 1

X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 2

X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 3
GUID-676FEBEB-5405-478E-AE6A-2B67ECA8ABBB V1 EN

Figure 93: Binary inputs - X120 terminal block

UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKING
X110 (BIO).X110-SO1

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO2

REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER
X110 (BIO).X110-SO3
GUID-B36EC7FB-6FD6-43C4-8EE4-D4FA8D6F6874 V1 EN

Figure 94: Binary outputs - X110 terminal block

CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1

CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2

DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1

LNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2

CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3

TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
GUID-47B2D69C-8123-4C8F-B991-23B7CF6203FE V1 EN

Figure 95: Binary outputs - X100 terminal block

RED615 85
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

LED1
OK
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE ALARM
RESET

LED2
OK
LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE ALARM
RESET

LED3
OK
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE ALARM
RESET

LED4
OK
PCSITPC1_ALARM ALARM
RESET

LED5
OK
DARREC1_INPRO ALARM
RESET

GUID-C6F6FBBA-3D33-45E5-9ECA-D7B16B8A44CE V2 EN

86 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

LED6
OR6
OK
T1PTTR1_ALARM B1 O ALARM
T2PTTR1_ALARM B2 RESET
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

LED7
OK
CCBRBRF1_TRBU ALARM
RESET

LED8
OK
DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED ALARM
RESET

LED9
OR6
OK
SSCBR1_ALARMS B1 O ALARM
CCSPVC1_ALARM B2 RESET
TCSSCBR_ALARM B3
B4
B5
B6

LED10
OK
BSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A ALARM
RESET

LED11
OK
BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_A ALARM
RESET

GUID-7B65F94B-1348-4472-9495-AD53803043D3 V2 EN

Figure 96: Default LED connection

3.4.3.7 Functional diagrams for other timer logics

The configuration also includes line differential operate, inactive communication and
backup protection operate logic. The operate logics are connected to the minimum
pulse timer TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The
output from TPGAPC1 is connected to the binary outputs.
OR
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE B1 O
LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE B2 TPGAPC1
IN1 OUT1 DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSE
IN2 OUT2 LNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM

OR
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE B1 O
PCSITPC1_ALARM B2

GUID-7ECCC7B0-4347-46C0-B3D1-AF4C7B1F8430 V2 EN

Figure 97: Timer logic for differential operate and communication not active

RED615 87
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

TPGAPC2
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE IN1 OUT1 BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE
IN2 OUT2

OR6 OR6
PHxPTOC_OPERATE B1 O B1 O BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE
NSPTOC_OPERATE B2 B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE B4 B4
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B5 B5
EFPDAM_OPERATE B6 B6

EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
WPWDE_OPERATE
ROVPTOV_OPERATE
GUID-65003347-878B-49F5-A451-4EE2F7061C1A V1 EN

Figure 98: Timer logic for backup protection operate pulse

3.4.3.8 Other functions

The configuration includes few instances of multipurpose protection function

MAPGAPC, harmonics-based earth-fault protection, high-impedance fault detection
function PHIZ, runtime counter for machines and devices MDSOPT and few
instances of different types of timers and control functions. These functions are not
included in application configuration but they can be added based on the system
requirements.

3.5 Standard configuration C

3.5.1 Applications
The standard configuration for line current differential protection including non-
directional earth-fault protection and autoreclosing is mainly intended for cable feeder
applications in the distribution networks. The standard configuration for line current
differential protection includes support for in-zone transformers.

The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with default
settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing and internal
signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be further adapted to
different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs by modifying the
internal functionality using PCM600.

88 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

3.5.2 Functions

RED615 LINE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION AND CONTROL RELAY

With in-zone power transformer support
STANDARD
CONFIGURATION
C

PROTECTION LOCAL HMI ALSO AVAILABLE

- Binary Signal Transfer function (BST)

2 - Disturbance and fault recorder
Master Trip
- Event log and recorded data
Conguration A
System

Lockout relay
HMI
Time
Authorization

- Local/Remote push button on LHMI

94/86 I ESC Clear
- Self-supervision
- Time synchronization: IEEE 1588 v2,
A
O R
L
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr SNTP, IRIG-B
- User management
IL2 0 A

2 - Web HMI
I2> I2/I1> 3Ith>F I
AND
ESC Clear

3I 46 46PD 49F
O R
L
OR

3Ith>T/G/C 3I>>>
49T/G/C 50P/51P
CONDITION MONITORING COMMUNICATION
AND SUPERVISION
3I>/Io>BF 3I> Io Protocols:
IEC 61850-8-1
51BF/51NBF 51P-1
Modbus
IEC 60870-5-103
2 DNP3
3I>> 3I2f> 3dI>L CBCM MCS 3I OPTS Interfaces:
51P-2 68 87L CBCM MCS 3I OPTM Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC)
Serial: Serial glass ber (ST),
RS-485, RS-232
Redundant protocols:
2 HSR
BST PCS TCS PRP
BST PCS TCM RSTP
Io

Io 2 CONTROL AND INDICATION 1) MEASUREMENT

Io>>> Io> Io>> PHIZ
50N/51N 51N-1 51N-2 HIZ - I, Io
Object Ctrl 2) Ind 3)
- Limit value supervision
CB 1 - - Load prole record
Io>HA - Symmetrical components
DC 2 3
51NHA
ES 1 2
1)
Check availability of binary inputs/outputs
Analog interface types 1)

from technical documentation Current transformer 4

2)
Control and indication function for
18 primary object Voltage transformer -
MAP SOTF
3)
Status indication function for
primary object
1)
Conventional transformer inputs
MAP SOTF

OI
79

REMARKS
Optional 3 No. of Calculated OR Alternative
function instances value function to be
Io/Uo dened when
3I ordering

RED615
AT REMOTE
END

GUID-C4999021-E1FE-4D55-AB91-FC7C6963501B V2 EN

Figure 99: Functionality overview for standard configuration C

3.5.2.1 Default I/O connections

Connector pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physical
connections section.

RED615 89
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

Table 21: Default connections for binary inputs

Binary input Description
X110-BI1 External start of breaker failure protection
X110-BI2 Binary signal transfer input
X110-BI3 Circuit breaker low gas pressure alarm
X110-BI4 Circuit breaker spring charged indication
X110-BI5 Circuit breaker truck in (service position) indication
X110-BI6 Circuit breaker truck out (service position) indication
X110-BI7 Earthing switch closed indication
X110-BI8 Earthing switch open indication
X120-BI1 Blocking input for general use
X120-BI2 Circuit breaker close
X120-BI3 Circuit breaker open
X120-BI4 Lockout reset

Table 22: Default connections for binary outputs

Binary input Description
X100-PO1 Close circuit breaker
X100-PO2 Breaker failure backup trip to upstream breaker
X100-SO1 Line differential protection trip alarm
X100-SO2 Protection communication failure or differential protection not available
X100-PO3 Open circuit breaker/trip 1
X100-PO4 Open circuit breaker/trip 2
X110- SO1 Upstream overcurrent blocking
X110- SO2 Backup protection operated
X110- SO3 Binary transfer signal

Table 23: Default connections for LEDs

LED Description
1 Line differential protection biased stage operate
2 Line differential protection instantaneous stage operate
3 Line differential protection is not available
4 Protection communication failure
5 Autoreclose in progress
6 Backup protection operated
7 Circuit breaker failure protection - backup trip operate
8 Disturbance recorder triggered
9 Current transformer failure or trip circuit or circuit breaker supervision
10 Binary signal transfer receive
11 Binary signal transfer send

90 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

3.5.2.2 Default disturbance recorder settings

Table 24: Default disturbance recorder analog channels
Channel Description
1 IL1
2 IL2
3 IL3
4 Io
5 -
6 -
7 -
8 -
9 -
10 -
11 -
12 -

Table 25: Default disturbance recorder binary channels

Channel ID text Level trigger mode
1 LNPLDF1 - start Positive or Rising
2 LNPLDF1 - operate Positive or Rising
3 PHIPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
4 PHHPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
5 PHHPTOC2 - start Positive or Rising
6 PHLPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
7 T1PTTR1 - start Positive or Rising
8 T2PTTR1 - start Positive or Rising
9 PDNSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
10 NSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
11 NSPTOC2 - start Positive or Rising
12 EFHPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
13 EFIPTOC1- start Positive or Rising
14 EFLPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
15 EFLPTOC2 - start Positive or Rising
16 CCBRBRF1 - trret Level trigger off
17 CCBRBRF1 - trbu Level trigger off
18 LNPLDF1 - rstd2h Level trigger off
19 LNPLDF1 - prot not active Level trigger off
Table continues on next page

RED615 91
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

Channel ID text Level trigger mode

20 PHIPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
PHHPTOC1 - operate
PHHPTOC2 - operate
PHLPTOC1 - operate
21 NSPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
NSPTOC2 - operate
22 T1PTTR1- operate Level trigger off
T2PTTR2 - operate
23 PDNSPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
24 EFIPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
EFHPTOC1 - operate
EFLPTOC1 - operate
EFLPTOC2 - operate
25 T1PTTR1 - alarm Level trigger off
26 T2PTTR2 - alarm Level trigger off
27 INRPHAR1 - blk2h Level trigger off
28 PCSITPC1 - alarm Level trigger off
29 CCSPVC1 - alarm Level trigger off
30 X110BI4 - CB spring charged Level trigger off
31 X110BI3 - gas pressure alarm Level trigger off
32 X120BI3 - CB opened Level trigger off
33 X120BI2 - CB closed Level trigger off
34 X120BI1 - ext OC blocking Level trigger off
35 DARREC1 - unsuc recl Level trigger off
DARREC1 - close CB
36 DARREC1 - inpro Level trigger off

3.5.3 Functional diagrams

The functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and function-
to-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed with
PCM600 according to the application requirements.

The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside the
IEDs standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels available for the
disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbance
recorders parameter settings.

The phase currents to the IED are fed from a current transformer. The residual current
to the IED is fed from either residually connected CTs, an external core balance CT,
neutral CT or internally calculated.

92 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

RED615 offers six different settings group which can be set based on individual
needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting group settings
available in RED615.

Depending on the communication protocol the required function block needs to be

instantiated in the configuration.

3.5.3.1 Functional diagrams for protection

The functional diagrams describe the IED's protection functionality in detail and
according to the factory set default connections.

Line differential protection with in-zone power transformer LNPLDF1 is intended to

be the main protection offering exclusive unit protection for the power distribution
lines or cables. The stabilized low stage can be blocked if the current transformer
failure is detected. The operate value of the instantaneous high stage can be multiplied
by predefined settings if the ENA_MULT_HS input is activated. In this configuration
it is activated by the open status information of the remote-end circuit breaker and
earth switch, and if the disconnector is not in the intermediate state. The intention of
this connection is to lower the setting value of the instantaneous high stage by
multiplying with setting High Op value Mult, in case of internal fault.

Alarm LED3 informs when the line differential is not available possibly due to a
failure in protection communication, or if the function is set in a test mode.

Four non-directional overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit
protection. Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection, instantaneous stage,
PHIPTOC1 can be blocked by energizing the binary input X120:BI1. The
instantaneous and first high stages are blocked by activation of line differential
protection.

RED615 93
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

LNPLDF1
OR
BLOCK OPERATE LNPLDF1_OPERATE
CCSPVC1_FAIL B1 O BLOCK_LS START LNPLDF1_START
REMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL B2 ENA_MULT_HS STR_LS_LOC
STR_LS_REM
OPR_LS_LOC LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC
OPR_LS_REM LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM
OPR_HS_LOC LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC
OR OPR_HS_REM LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM
BLKD2H_LOC LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC
REMOTE_FEEDER_READY B1 O BLKD2H_REM LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM
REMOTE_CB_OPEN B2 PRO_ACTIVE LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

OR
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC B1 O LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM B2

NOT
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE IN OUT LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

OR
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC B1 O LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM B2

OR
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC B1 O LNPLDF_BLKD2H
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM B2

GUID-95B0A554-5C39-4F26-A640-F78788B2FA00 V2 EN

Figure 100: Line differential protection functions

OR PHIPTOC1
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE B1 O BLOCK OPERATE PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
BX120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING B2 INRPHAR1_BLK2H ENA_MULT START PHIPTOC1_START

PHHPTOC1
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE BLOCK OPERATE PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHHPTOC1_START

PHHPTOC2
BLOCK OPERATE PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHHPTOC2_START

PHLPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHLPTOC1_START

Grouped function operate

OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O PHxPTOC_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4
B5
B6

GUID-27D40A12-2206-4ADE-AA31-9366909740BF V1 EN

Figure 101: Overcurrent protection functions

The upstream blocking from the start of the instantaneous as well as the high stage
overcurrent protection function is connected to the binary output X110:SO1. This
output can be used to send a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protection
stage of the IED at the upstream bay.

94 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

OR6
PHIPTOC1_START B1 O UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKING
PHHPTOC1_START B2
PHHPTOC2_START B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-FFE28D0E-8985-4E5C-A14B-CB6DE0B30D72 V1 EN

Figure 102: Upstream blocking logic

Four stages are provided for non-directional earth-fault protection. According to the
order code, the configuration can also include optional harmonics-based earth-fault
protection HAEFPTOC1. On detection of current circuit failure, all earth-fault
functions are blocked to inhibit unwanted operation, which can occur due to apparent
residual current.

EFIPTOC1
CCSPVC1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE EFIPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFIPTOC1_START

EFHPTOC1
CCSPVC1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFHPTOC1_START

EFLPTOC1
CCSPVC1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE EFLPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFLPTOC1_START

EFLPTOC2
CCSPVC1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE EFLPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFLPTOC2_START

OR6
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O EFxPTOC_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B4
B5
B6

GUID-0E48EAFB-CE67-46B6-88A8-59B4957D7E5B V2 EN

Figure 103: Earth-fault protection functions

The output BLK2H of three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 offers the possibility to
either block the function or multiply the active settings for any of the available
overcurrent function blocks.

RED615 95
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

INRPHAR1
BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H

GUID-7F2BFC97-5C00-40C0-ABBA-3FC501D58D5D V1 EN

Figure 104: Inrush detector function

Two negative-sequence overcurrent protection stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 are

provided for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect the
feeder against phase unbalance. The negative sequence overcurrent protections are
blocked in case of detection in failure in secondary circuit of current transformer.

NSPTOC1
CCSPVC1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC1_START

NSPTOC2
CCSPVC1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC2_START

OR
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O NSPTOC_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2

GUID-3DF9A5C8-F9D5-44B7-BBF6-23B50666086B V2 EN

Figure 105: Negative-sequence overcurrent protection function

The phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 protects for interruptions in the

normal three-phase load supply, for example, in downed conductor situations. The
function is blocked in case of detection in failure in secondary circuit of current
transformer.

PDNSPTOC1
CCSPVC1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
START PDNSPTOC1_START

GUID-74381B2D-CA6F-445F-A1CC-6096EC6AA562 V2 EN

Figure 106: Phase discontinuity protection

Two thermal overload protection functions are incorporated one with one time
constant T1PTTR1 and other with two time constants T2PTTR1 for detecting
overloads under varying load conditions. The BLK_CLOSE output of the function is
used to block the closing operation of circuit breaker.

96 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

T1PTTR1
BLK_OPR OPERATE T1PTTR1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START T1PTTR1_START
TEMP_AMB ALARM T1PTTR1_ALARM
BLK_CLOSE T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

T2PTTR1
BLOCK OPERATE T2PTTR1_OPERATE
TEMP_AMB START T2PTTR1_START
ALARM T2PTTR1_ALARM
BLK_CLOSE T2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

GUID-C71ADCD1-5E9F-47CF-AF75-D8CD007C423A V1 EN

Figure 107: Thermal overcurrent protection function

The negative-sequence overcurrent protection, phase discontinuity

protection and earth-fault protection are all used as backup protection
against line differential protection.

The backup protection operated information is available at binary output X110:SO2

which can be used for external alarm purpose.

The optional autoreclosing function is configured to be initiated by operate signals

from a number of protection stages through the INIT_1...5 inputs. It is possible to
create individual autoreclosing sequences for each input.

The autoreclosing function can be inhibited with the INHIBIT_RECL input. By

default, few selected protection function operations are connected to this input. A
control command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks the
autoreclosing function via the CBXCBR1-SELECTED signal.

The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosing sequence is expressed with the
CB_READY input in DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are connected
to the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open command from
the autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3, whereas the close
command is connected directly to binary output X100:PO1.

RED615 97
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

DARREC1
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE INIT_1 OPEN_CB DARREC1_OPEN_CB
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_2 CLOSE_CB DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE INIT_3 CMD_WAIT
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_4 INPRO DARREC1_INPRO
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_5 LOCKED
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_6 PROT_CRD
DEL_INIT_2 UNSUC_RECL DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED CB_POS
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED CB_READY
INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
OR6 RECL_ON
SYNC
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM B5
B6

GUID-963EDA28-A80A-4E12-A265-9804FB4429EA V1 EN

Figure 108: Autorecloser function

Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by a
number of different protection functions available in the IED as well as externally by
binary input X110:BI1. The circuit breaker failure protection function offers different
operating modes associated with the circuit breaker position and the measured phase
and residual currents.

The circuit breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET and
TRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker through
TRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output is used to give a backup trip to the breaker
feeding upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to the
binary output X100:PO2.

CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O START TRBU CCBRBRF1_TRBU
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 POSCLOSE TRRET CCBRBRF1_TRRET
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3 B3 CB_FAULT
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6

OR6
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B1 O
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B4
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B5
LNPLDF1_OPERATE B6

X110_BI1_EXT_CCBRBRF_START
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_OPERATE
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
GUID-3C4BA546-C7F2-4BEE-B081-73C7AD74CE4E V1 EN

Figure 109: Circuit breaker failure protection function

The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip logics:
TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is available at
binary output X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are provided with a
lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal duration setting. If
the lockout operation mode is selected, binary input X120:BI4 can be assigned to
RST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external reset with a push button.

98 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

TRPPTRC1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC1_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6

OR6
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B3
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B4
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B5
LNPLDF1_OPERATE B6

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_OPERATE

X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-97428C4E-DEE5-44DB-8C51-455FB2D9F1E1 V1 EN

Figure 110: Trip logic TRPPTRC1

TRPPTRC2
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC2_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6

OR6
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B3
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B4
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B5
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B6

LNPLDF1_OPERATE
CCBRBRF1_TRRET
T2PTTR1_OPERATE

X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-ADD6D3E1-D539-4D7A-8096-715DD0B3D7D8 V1 EN

Figure 111: Trip logic TRPPTRC2

3.5.3.2 Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder

The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to trigger
the disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the disturbance
recorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the selected signals from
different functions and the few binary inputs are also connected to the disturbance
recorder.

RED615 99
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

RDRE1
LNPLDF1_START C1 TRIGGERED DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
LNPLDF1_OPERATE C2
PHIPTOC1_START C3
PHHPTOC1_START C4
PHHPTOC2_START C5
OR6 PHLPTOC1_START C6
T1PTTR1_START C7
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O T2PTTR1_START C8
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 PDNSPTOC1_START C9
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3 NSPTOC1_START C10
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4 NSPTOC2_START C11
B5 EFHPTOC1_START C12
B6 EFIPTOC1_START C13
EFLPTOC1_START C14
EFLPTOC2_START C15
CCBRBRF1_TRRET C16
CCBRBRF1_TRBU C17
OR LNPLDF_BLKD2H C18
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE C19
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O C20
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 C21
C22
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE C23
C24
OR T1PTTR1_ALARM C25
T2PTTR1_ALARM C26
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B1 O INRPHAR1_BLK2H C27
T2PTTR1_OPERATE B2 PCSITPC1_ALARM C28
CCSPVC1_ALARM C29
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED C30
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM C31
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED C32
OR6 X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED C33
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING C34
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O C35
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B2 DARREC1_INPRO C36
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B3 C37
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B4 C38
B5 C39
B6 C40
C41
C42
C43
C44
OR C45
C46
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL B1 O C47
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2 C48
C49
C50
C51
C52
C53
C54
C55
C56
C57
C58
C59
C60
C61
C62
C63
C64

GUID-C658211A-FDF1-4ECB-AD66-34E603CE8E4A V2 EN

Figure 112: Disturbance recorder

3.5.3.3 Functional diagrams for condition monitoring

CCSPVC1 detects failures in the current measuring circuits. When a failure is

detected, it can be used to block the current protection functions that measure
calculated sequence component currents or residual current to avoid unnecessary
operation.

CCSPVC1
BLOCK FAIL CCSPVC1_FAIL
ALARM CCSPVC1_ALARM

GUID-57D1F65C-2438-4C84-926D-8D21A1FAB8E7 V2 EN

Figure 113: Current circuit supervision function

Circuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR1 supervises the switch status based on

the connected binary input information and the measured current levels. SSCBR1
introduces various supervision methods.

100 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

Set the parameters for SSCBR1 properly.

SSCBR1
BLOCK TRV_T_OP_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN TRV_T_CL_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE SPR_CHR_ALM SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM
CB_OPEN_COMMAND OPEN_CB_EXE OPR_ALM SSCBR1_OPR_ALM
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND CLOSE_CB_EXE OPR_LO SSCBR1_OPR_LO
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM PRES_ALM_IN IPOW_ALM SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM
PRES_LO_IN IPOW_LO SSCBR1_IPOW_LO
CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED SPR_CHR_ST CB_LIFE_ALM SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED SPR_CHR MON_ALM SSCBR1_MON_ALM
RST_IPOW PRES_ALM SSCBR1_PRES_ALM
RST_CB_WEAR PRES_LO SSCBR1_PRES_LO
RST_TRV_T OPENPOS
RST_SPR_T INVALIDPOS
CLOSEPOS

GUID-E16440E7-97F8-4BA5-A65A-8832F72F6333 V1 EN

Figure 114: Circuit breaker condition monitoring alarm

OR6
SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM B1 O
SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM B2
SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM B3
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM B4
SSCBR1_OPR_LO B5 OR
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM B6
B1 O SSCBR1_ALARMS
B2

OR6
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO B1 O
SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM B2
SSCBR1_MON_ALM B3
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM B4
SSCBR1_PRES_LO B5
B6

GUID-CA85737C-AE1C-4BB1-B7AC-97A97EB90DAD V1 EN

Figure 115: Logic for circuit breaker monitoring alarm

NOT
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED IN OUT CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED

GUID-9B1B6395-2EAC-4927-9D9E-77EE41162FF6 V1 EN

Figure 116: Logic for start of circuit breaker spring charging

Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included; TCSSCBR1 for power
output X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. The functions are
blocked by the master trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker open
signal.

It is assumed that there is no external resistor in the circuit breaker

tripping coil circuit connected in parallel with the circuit breaker
normally open auxiliary contact.

Set the parameters for TCSSCBR1 properly.

RED615 101
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR1_ALARM

TCSSCBR2
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR2_ALARM

OR
TCSSCBR1_ALARM B1 O TCSSCBR_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2

GUID-521ECF9A-25C2-4582-8D40-1EA572E4C847 V1 EN

Figure 117: Trip circuit supervision function

OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B1 O TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-36DBAACC-5D67-414F-89E1-DAB5F6411181 V1 EN

Figure 118: Logic for blocking of trip circuit supervision

Protection communication supervision PCSITPC1 is used in the configuration to

block the operation of the line differential function. This way, the malfunction of the
line differential is prevented. The activation of binary signal transfer outputs during
protection communication failure is also blocked. These are done internally without
connections in the configurations. The protection communication supervision alarm
is connected to the alarm LED 4, disturbance recorder and binary output X100:SO2.

PCSITPC1
OK
WARNING
ALARM PCSITPC1_ALARM
COMM

GUID-807946BF-54A3-4205-8409-DC71A4518C36 V2 EN

Figure 119: Protection communication supervision function

The binary signal transfer function BSTGGIO1 is used for changing any binary
information which can be used for example, in protection schemes, interlocking and
alarms. There are eight separate inputs and corresponding outputs available.

In this configuration, one physical input X110:BI2 is connected to the binary signal
transfer channel one. Local feeder ready and local circuit breaker open information are
connected to the BSTGGIO input 6 and 7. These are interlocking information from
control logic. The information of detected current transformer fault is connected to the
input 8.

102 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

As a consequence of sending interlocking information to remote end, also receiving of

same information locally is needed. Therefore, remote feeder ready, remote circuit
breaker open and remote current transformer failure are connected to the binary signal
transfer function outputs. The remote binary transfer output signal is connected to the
binary output X110:SO3.

BSTGGIO1
X110_BI2_BINARY_TRANSFER SEND_SIG_1 RECV_SIG_1 REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER
SEND_SIG_2 RECV_SIG_2
SEND_SIG_3 RECV_SIG_3
SEND_SIG_4 RECV_SIG_4
SEND_SIG_5 RECV_SIG_5
LOCAL_FEEDER_READY SEND_SIG_6 RECV_SIG_6 REMOTE_FEEDER_READY
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS SEND_SIG_7 RECV_SIG_7 REMOTE_CB_OPEN
CCSPVC1_FAIL SEND_SIG_8 RECV_SIG_8 REMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL
SEND_SIG_A BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_A
RECV_SIG_A BSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A

GUID-7ACC6207-5896-4449-9E89-BAFA92A73010 V2 EN

Figure 120: Binary signal transfer function

3.5.3.4 Functional diagrams for control and interlocking

Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.
DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 and
ESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in
standard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing switch
status information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.

DCSXSWI1
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST POSOPEN OPENPOS
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS DCSXSWI1_OKPOS

GUID-F151A155-141D-4581-9218-30796B22E7F0 V1 EN

Figure 121: Disconnector 1 control logic

ESSXSWI1
X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED POSOPEN OPENPOS ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS

GUID-8FF4B653-B8F2-4A83-AEB0-D0A371F8E7F1 V1 EN

Figure 122: Earthswitch 1 control logic

The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated. The
input can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of the
disconnector or circuit breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of the trip
logics and remote feeder position indication. Master trip logic, disconnector and
earth-switch statuses are local feeder ready information to be sent for the remote end.

The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or circuit breaker
truck is either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This, together with
the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-enable signal to
the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for circuit breaker is
always enabled.

RED615 103
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

If REMOTE_FEEDER_READY information is missing, for

example, in case of protection communication not connected, it
disables the breaker closing in the local IED.

Any additional signals required by the application can be connected

for opening and closing of circuit breaker.

CBXCBR1
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN SELECTED CBXCBR1_SELECTED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE EXE_OP CBXCBR1_EXE_OP
TRUE ENA_OPEN EXE_CL CBXCBR1_EXE_CL
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE ENA_CLOSE OP_REQ
FALSE BLK_OPEN CL_REQ
CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE BLK_CLOSE OPENPOS CBXCBR1_OPENPOS
CBXCBR1_AU_OPEN AU_OPEN CLOSEPOS
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE AU_CLOSE OKPOS
TRIP OPEN_ENAD
SYNC_OK CLOSE_ENAD
SYNC_ITL_BYP

GUID-B9EB21FF-B3F1-4604-875E-D679BF21A5D0 V2 EN

Figure 123: Circuit breaker 1 control logic

OR
CBXCBR1_EXE_CL B1 O CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2

GUID-033E6103-FCE5-460E-AB2C-127523940A3E V1 EN

Figure 124: Signals for closing coil of circuit breaker 1

OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B1 O CB_OPEN_COMMAND
CBXCBR1_EXE_OP B2
DARREC1_OPEN_CB B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-304247AE-6DEC-494B-AEDD-C884E5C42731 V1 EN

Figure 125: Signals for opening coil of circuit breaker 1

104 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

AND
REMOTE_FEEDER_READY B1 O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
LOCAL_FEEDER_READY B2

AND6
DCSXSWI1_OKPOS B1 O LOCAL_FEEDER_READY
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS B2
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED B3
B4
NOT B5
B6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP IN OUT

NOT
TRPPTRC2_TRIP IN OUT

NOT
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM IN OUT

GUID-BB477666-A6B7-43C1-AE6B-D20528F6EDFC V1 EN

Figure 126: Circuit breaker 1 close enable logic

Connect higher-priority conditions before enabling the circuit

breaker. These conditions cannot be bypassed with bypass feature of
the function.

OR6
T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE B1 O CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE
T2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-8DFAE731-FCD9-4B2B-B0AF-04D1E35FCD1E V1 EN

Figure 127: Circuit breaker 1 close blocking logic

The configuration includes logic for generating circuit breaker external closing and
opening command with the IED in local or remote mode.

Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command and
modify it according to the application.

Connect the additional signals for closing and opening of the circuit
breaker in local or remote mode, if it is applicable for the application.

AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2

GUID-1BAF2BFA-27D8-4E23-81F9-3D0B8F916E56 V1 EN

Figure 128: External closing command for circuit breaker 1

RED615 105
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2

GUID-B2A3DFEB-8777-40F7-AA7B-39FD2EEF3F09 V1 EN

Figure 129: External opening command for circuit breaker 1

3.5.3.5 Functional diagrams for measurement functions

The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase current
measurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card in
the back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the sequence
current and the residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures the residual
current.

The measurements can be seen in the LHMI and they are available under the
measurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks can
generate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the measured
current values.

Load profile record LDPRLRC1 is included in the measurements sheet. LDPRLRC1

offers the ability to observe the loading history of the corresponding feeder.

CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM

GUID-B3B20052-DF2B-4C6F-AFFC-DF6EBE403620 V1 EN

Figure 130: Current measurement: Three-phase current measurement

CSMSQI1

GUID-5541207C-33F0-4C30-BC61-FA4B4828ED6E V1 EN

Figure 131: Current measurement: Sequence current measurement

RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN

GUID-8C5CCD15-3A6D-494F-B1CF-A96EC9C7D8C5 V1 EN

Figure 132: Current measurement: Residual current measurement

106 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

FLTRFRC1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD

GUID-557D77EF-39F9-4E45-B681-4214A621ABBF V2 EN

Figure 133: Other measurement: Data monitoring

LDPRLRC1
RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM

GUID-86C0CEA1-CD8A-4D98-83DE-D9F56D43A917 V2 EN

Figure 134: Other measurement: Load profile record

3.5.3.6 Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs

X110_BI1_EXT_CCBRBRF_START
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 1

X110_BI2_BINARY_TRANSFER
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2

X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3

X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4

X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5

X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6

X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7

X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8
GUID-7EFCB700-0C8D-48F8-8616-61A3E64F6C4B V1 EN

Figure 135: Binary inputs - X110 terminal block

RED615 107
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 1

X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 2

X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 3

X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 4
GUID-C10DB2F8-2663-4CDC-B032-F425F58578D9 V1 EN

Figure 136: Binary inputs - X120 terminal block

UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKING
X110 (BIO).X110-SO1

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO2

REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER
X110 (BIO).X110-SO3
GUID-C643DA33-07A8-41F1-89E9-DD9CB7237283 V1 EN

Figure 137: Binary outputs - X110 terminal block

CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1

CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2

DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1

LNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2

CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3

TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
GUID-0ACF5C83-087E-44ED-AA03-03376F3F090C V1 EN

Figure 138: Binary outputs - X100 terminal block

108 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

LED1
OK
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE ALARM
RESET

LED2
OK
LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE ALARM
RESET

LED3
OK
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE ALARM
RESET

LED4
OK
PCSITPC1_ALARM ALARM
RESET

LED5
OK
DARREC1_INPRO ALARM
RESET

GUID-47DBECE3-D6D9-47CB-ACA7-A7D3B54613EA V2 EN

RED615 109
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

LED6
OR6
OK
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
T1PTTR1_ALARM B2 RESET
T2PTTR1_ALARM B3
B4
B5
B6

LED7
OK
CCBRBRF1_TRBU ALARM
RESET

LED8
OK
DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED ALARM
RESET

LED9
OR6
OK
SSCBR1_ALARMS B1 O ALARM
CCSPVC1_ALARM B2 RESET
TCSSCBR_ALARM B3
B4
B5
B6

LED10
OK
BSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A ALARM
RESET

LED11
OK
BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_A ALARM
RESET

GUID-81B95D0E-F4E0-4BE7-A2F6-ABFC9D885FF5 V2 EN

Figure 139: Default LED connection

3.5.3.7 Functional diagrams for other timer logics

The configuration also includes line differential operate, inactive communication and
backup protection operate logic. The operate logics are connected to the minimum
pulse timer TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The
output from TPGAPC1 is connected to the binary outputs.
OR
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE B1 O
LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE B2 TPGAPC1
IN1 OUT1 DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSE
IN2 OUT2 LNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM

OR
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE B1 O
PCSITPC1_ALARM B2

GUID-FBFAE053-C586-47D2-9D37-918400B7516B V2 EN

Figure 140: Timer logic for differential operate and communication not active

110 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

TPGAPC2
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE IN1 OUT1 BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE
IN2 OUT2

OR6
EFxPTOC_OPERATE B1 O BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE
PHxPTOC_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC_OPERATE B3
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B4
B5
B6

GUID-E7E999CE-55E3-443A-95A2-4BF9339375AD V1 EN

Figure 141: Timer logic for backup protection operate pulse

3.5.3.8 Other functions

The configuration includes few instances of multipurpose protection MAPGAPC,

harmonics-based earth-fault protection, high-impedance fault detection function
PHIZ, runtime counter for machines and devices MDSOPT and few instances of
different types of timers and control functions. These functions are not included in
application configuration but they can be added based on the system requirements.

3.6 Standard configuration D

3.6.1 Applications
The standard configuration with directional overcurrent and directional earth-fault
protection, phase-voltage and frequency based protection is mainly intended for cable
feeder applications in distribution networks. The standard configuration for line
current differential protection includes support for in-zone transformers. The
configuration also includes additional options to select earth-fault protection based on
admittance, wattmetric or harmonic principle.

Standard configuration D is not designed for using all the available functionality
content in one relay at the same time. Frequency protection functions and third
instances of voltage protection functions must be added with the Application
Configuration tool. To ensure the performance of the relay, the user-specific
configuration load is verified with the Application Configuration tool in PCM600.

The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with default
settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing and internal
signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be further adapted to
different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs by modifying the
internal functionality using PCM600.

RED615 111
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

3.6.2 Functions
UL1UL2UL3
Uo

RED615 LINE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION AND CONTROL RELAY

With in-zone power transformer support
STANDARD
CONFIGURATION
D

PROTECTION LOCAL HMI ALSO AVAILABLE

- Binary Signal Transfer function (BST)

2 - Disturbance and fault recorder
Master Trip
- Event log and recorded data
Conguration A
System

Lockout relay
HMI
Time
Authorization

- Local/Remote push button on LHMI

94/86 I ESC Clear
- Self-supervision
- Time synchronization: IEEE 1588 v2,
A
O R
L
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr SNTP, IRIG-B
- User management
IL2 0 A

2 - Web HMI
I2> I2/I1> 3Ith>F I ESC Clear

AND
3I 46 46PD 49F
O R
L
OR

3Ith>T/G/C 3I>>>
49T/G/C 50P/51P
CONDITION MONITORING COMMUNICATION
AND SUPERVISION
2
Protocols:
3I>/Io>BF 3I> 3I>>
IEC 61850-8-1/-9-2LE
51BF/51NBF 67-1 67-2
Modbus
IEC 60870-5-103
DNP3
3I2f> 3dI>L 3I FUSEF CBCM MCS 3I Interfaces:
68 87L 60 CBCM MCS 3I Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC)
U12 Serial: Serial glass ber (ST),
RS-485, RS-232
Redundant protocols:
Io 2 HSR
BST OPTS PCS TCS PRP
BST OPTM PCS TCM RSTP
Io

Io Io>> PHIZ CONTROL AND INDICATION 1) MEASUREMENT

51N-2 HIZ
- I, U, Io, Uo, P, Q, E, pf, f
Object Ctrl 2) Ind 3)
- Limit value supervision
CB 1 - - Load prole record
Uo 2 - RTD/mA measurement (optional)
DC 2 3
Io> Io>> Io>IEF - Symmetrical components
67N-1 67N-2 67NIEF ES 1 2
Analog interface types 1)
1)
Check availability of binary inputs/outputs
from technical documentation Current transformer 4
3 3 2)
Control and indication function for
Yo> Po> Io>HA primary object Voltage transformer 2) 5
21YN 32N 51NHA 3)
Status indication function for 1)
Conventional transformer inputs
OR OR primary object 2)
One of the ve inputs is reserved for
future applications
UL1UL2UL3

3 3
3U< U2> U1< 3U> SYNC OI PQM3I PQM3U PQMU
27 47O- 47U+ 59 25 79 PQM3I PQM3V PQMV
U12
UL1UL2UL3 3 4
Uo> f>/f<, PQUUB
df/dt PQVUB
59G
81

REMARKS
18 Optional 3 No. of Calculated OR Alternative
2xRTD
1xmA
FLOC MAP SOTF function instances value function to be
21FL MAP SOTF Io/Uo dened when
3I ordering

RED615
AT REMOTE
END

GUID-F76822E6-DDB6-44F2-8704-5A5B3035BAFD V2 EN

Figure 142: Functionality overview for standard configuration D

112 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

3.6.2.1 Default I/O connections

Connector pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physical
connections section.
Table 26: Default connections for binary inputs
BIO card Description
X110-BI1 Lockout reset
X110-BI2 Binary transfer signal input
X110-BI3 Circuit breaker gas pressure alarm signal
X110-BI4 Circuit breaker spring charged indication
X110-BI5 Circuit breaker truck in service
X110-BI6 Circuit breaker truck in test
X110-BI7 Earthing switch in closed position
X110-BI8 Earthing switch in opened position
X120-BI1 External blocking signal for overcurrent instantaneous stage
X120-BI2 Circuit breaker in closed position
X120-BI3 Circuit breaker opened position
X120-BI4 -

Table 27: Default connections for binary outputs

Binary input Description
X100-PO1 Close circuit close command
X100-PO2 Circuit breaker failed signal - Backup trip to upstream breaker
X100-SO1 Line differential protection operated
X100-SO2 Protection communication failure or differential protection not available
X100-PO3 Circuit breaker open command
X100-PO4 Master trip 2 activated
X110- SO1 Blocking signal for upstream overcurrent protection
X110- SO2 Backup protection operated
X110- SO3 Binary transfer signal
X110- SO4 -

Table 28: Default connections for LEDs

LED Description
1 Line differential protection biased stage operated
2 Line differential protection instantaneous stage operated
3 Line differential protection not active
4 Protection communication supervision alarm
5 Autoreclose operation in progress
Table continues on next page

RED615 113
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

LED Description
6 Backup protection operated
7 Circuit breaker failure protection - backup trip operate
8 Disturbance recorder triggered
9 Supervision alarm
10 Binary transfer signal received
11 Binary transfer signal send

3.6.2.2 Default disturbance recorder settings

Table 29: Default disturbance recorder analog channels
Channel Description
1 IL1
2 IL2
3 IL3
4 Io
5 Uo
6 U1
7 U2
8 U3
9 -
10 -
11 -
12 -

Table 30: Default disturbance recorder binary channels

Channel ID text Level trigger mode
1 LNPLDF1 - start Positive or Rising
2 LNPLDF1 - operate Positive or Rising
3 PHIPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
4 DPHHPDOC1 - start Positive or Rising
5 DPHLPDOC1 - start Positive or Rising
6 DPHLPDOC2 - start Positive or Rising
7 NSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
8 NSPTOC2 - start Positive or Rising
9 INTRPTEF1 - start Positive or Rising
10 EFHPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
11 DEFLPDEF1 - start Positive or Rising
WPWDE1 - start
EFPADM1 - start
Table continues on next page

114 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

Channel ID text Level trigger mode

12 DEFLPDEF2 - start Positive or Rising
WPWDE2 - start
EFPADM2 - start
13 DEFHPDEF1 - start Positive or Rising
WPWDE3 - start
EFPADM3 - start
14 PDNSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
15 T1PTTR1 - start Positive or Rising
16 T2PTTR1 - start Positive or Rising
17 PHPTOV1 - start Positive or Rising
18 PHPTOV2 - start Positive or Rising
20 ROVPTOV1 - start Positive or Rising
21 ROVPTOV2 - start Positive or Rising
23 PSPTUV1 - start Positive or Rising
24 NSPTOV1 - start Positive or Rising
25 PHPTUV1 - start Positive or Rising
26 PHPTUV2 - start Positive or Rising
32 CCBRBRF1 - trret Level trigger off
33 CCBRBRF1 - trbu Level trigger off
34 LNPLDF1 - rstd2h Level trigger off
35 LNPLDF1 - prot not active Level trigger off
36 PHIPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
DPHHPDOC1 - operate
DPHLPDOC1 - operate
DPHLPDOC2 - operate
37 NSPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
NSPTOC2 - operate
38 INTRPTEF1 - operate Level trigger off
39 EFHPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
40 DEFLPDEF1 - operate Level trigger off
WPWDE1 - operate
EFPADM1 - operate
DEFLPDEF2 - operate
WPWDE2 - operate
EFPADM2 - operate
DEFLPDEF3 - operate
WPWDE3 - operate
EFPADM3 - operate
41 PDNSPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
Table continues on next page

RED615 115
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

Channel ID text Level trigger mode

42 T1PTTR1 - alarm Level trigger off
43 T2PTTR2 - alarm Level trigger off
44 PHPTOV1 - operate Level trigger off
PHPTOV2 - operate
45 ROVPTOV1 - operate Level trigger off
ROVPTOV2 - operate
PSPTUV1 - operate
NSPTOV1 - operate
46 T1PTTR1 - operate Level trigger off
T2PTTR2 - operate
47 PHPTUV1 - operate Level trigger off
PHPTUV2 - operate
49 INRPHAR1 - blk2h Level trigger off
50 PCSITPC1 - alarm Level trigger off
51 CCSPVC1 - alarm Level trigger off
52 SEQSPVC - fusef 3ph Level trigger off
53 SEQSPVC - fusef u Level trigger off
54 X110BI4 - CB spring charged Level trigger off
55 X110BI3 - gas pressure alarm Level trigger off
56 X120BI3 - CB opened Level trigger off
57 X120BI2 - CB closed Level trigger off
58 X120BI1 - ext OC blocking Level trigger off
59 DARREC1 - unsuc recl Level trigger off
DARREC1 - close CB
60 DARREC1 - inpro Level trigger off

3.6.3 Functional diagrams

The functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and function-
to-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed with
PCM600 according to the application requirements.

The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside the
IEDs standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels available for the
disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbance
recorders parameter settings.

The phase currents to the IED are fed from a current transformer. The residual current
to the IED is fed from either residually connected CTs, an external core balance CT,
neutral CT or internally calculated.

116 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

The phase voltages to the IED are fed from a voltage transformer. The residual voltage
to the IED is fed from either residually connected VTs, an open delta connected VT
or internally calculated.

RED615 offers six different settings group which can be set based on individual
needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting group settings
available in RED615.

Depending on the communication protocol the required function block needs to be

instantiated in the configuration.

3.6.3.1 Functional diagrams for protection

The functional diagrams describe the IEDs protection functionality in detail and
according to the factory set default connections.

Line differential protection with in-zone power transformer LNPLDF1 is intended to

be the main protection offering exclusive unit protection for the power distribution
lines or cables. The stabilized low stage can be blocked if the current transformer
failure is detected. The operate value of the instantaneous high stage can be multiplied
by predefined settings if the ENA_MULT_HS input is activated. In this configuration,
it is activated by the open status information of the remote-end circuit breaker and
earth switch, and if the disconnector is not in the intermediate state. The intention of
this connection is to lower the setting value of the instantaneous high stage by
multiplying with setting High Op value Mult, in case of internal fault.

Alarm LED3 informs when the line differential is not available possibly due to a
failure in protection communication, or if the function is set in a test mode.

RED615 117
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

LNPLDF1
OR
BLOCK OPERATE LNPLDF1_OPERATE
CCSPVC1_FAIL B1 O BLOCK_LS START LNPLDF1_START
REMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL B2 ENA_MULT_HS STR_LS_LOC
STR_LS_REM
OPR_LS_LOC LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC
OPR_LS_REM LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM
OPR_HS_LOC LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC
OR OPR_HS_REM LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM
BLKD2H_LOC LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC
REMOTE_FEEDER_READY B1 O BLKD2H_REM LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM
REMOTE_CB_OPEN B2 PRO_ACTIVE LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

OR
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC B1 O LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM B2

NOT
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE IN OUT LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

OR
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC B1 O LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM B2

OR
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC B1 O LNPLDF_RSTD2H
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM B2

GUID-611D4EF5-AABC-487D-A52C-DF018335EC23 V2 EN

Figure 143: Line differential protection functions

Four overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit protection. Three
of them include directional functionality DPHxPDOC. Three-phase non-directional
overcurrent protection, instantaneous stage, PHIPTOC1 can be blocked by energizing
the binary input X120:BI1.

118 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

PHIPTOC1
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING BLOCK OPERATE PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHIPTOC1_START

DPHHPDOC1
BLOCK OPERATE DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DPHHPDOC1_START
NON_DIR

DPHLPDOC1
BLOCK OPERATE DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DPHLPDOC1_START
NON_DIR

DPHLPDOC2
BLOCK OPERATE DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DPHLPDOC2_START
NON_DIR

OR6
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B1 O DPHxPDOC_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B2
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-54378804-2337-4274-83AD-186C666871E0 V1 EN

Figure 144: Overcurrent protection functions

The upstream blocking from the start of the instantaneous as well as the high stage
overcurrent protection function is connected to the binary output X110:SO1. This
output can be used to send a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protection
stage of the IED at the upstream bay.

OR6
PHIPTOC1_START B1 O UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKING
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-A8F61C44-1CA7-4B82-8271-52E1469CDF37 V1 EN

Figure 145: Upstream blocking logic

Three stages are provided for directional earth-fault protection. According to the order
code, the directional earth-fault protection method can be based on conventional
directional earth-fault DEFxPDEF only or alternatively together with admittance-
based earth-fault protection EFPADM, wattmetric-based earth-fault protection
WPWDE or harmonics-based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC. In addition, there is
a dedicated protection stage INTRPTEF either for transient-based earth-fault
protection or for cable intermittent earth-fault protection in compensated networks.

RED615 119
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

DEFHPDEF1
BLOCK OPERATE DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFHPDEF1_START
RCA_CTL

DEFLPDEF1
BLOCK OPERATE DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFLPDEF1_START
RCA_CTL

DEFLPDEF2
BLOCK OPERATE DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFLPDEF2_START
RCA_CTL

OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O DEFxPDEF_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-CCDDEA70-4B90-414E-B10B-E65F9710D122 V1 EN

Figure 146: Directional earth-fault protection function

INTRPTEF1
BLOCK OPERATE INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
START INTRPTEF1_START
BLK_EF

GUID-C531508C-CB98-42F7-AF49-0D056C0D0E92 V1 EN

Figure 147: Transient or intermittent earth-fault protection function

120 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

WPWDE1
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE1_OPERATE
RCA_CTL START WPWDE1_START

WPWDE2
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE2_OPERATE
RCA_CTL START WPWDE2_START

WPWDE3
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE3_OPERATE
RCA_CTL START WPWDE3_START

OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O WPWDE_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-5E88FC8D-A67B-4C50-8EEC-B06EDC7B1FA5 V1 EN

Figure 148: Wattmetric protection function

EFPADM1
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM1_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM1_START

EFPADM2
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM2_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM2_START

EFPADM3
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM3_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM3_START

OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE B1 O EFPADM_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2
EFPADM3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-AD669779-AC0D-4AC9-AB1A-A1448469F4EB V1 EN

Figure 149: Admittance-based earth-fault protection function

RED615 121
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

Non-directional (cross-country) earth-fault protection, using calculated Io,

EFHPTOC protects against double earth-fault situations in isolated or compensated
networks. This protection function uses the calculated residual current originating
from the phase currents.

EFHPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFHPTOC1_START

GUID-169A80DA-A6A3-4BF5-9065-F78EFB23121C V1 EN

Figure 150: Cross-country earth-fault protection

The output BLK2H of three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 offers the possibility to
either block the function or multiply the active settings for any of the available
overcurrent function blocks.

INRPHAR1
BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H

GUID-6E272ED2-8A8D-47A0-9D96-095912F1894B V1 EN

Figure 151: Inrush detector function

Two negative-sequence overcurrent protection stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 are

provided for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect the
feeder against phase unbalance.

NSPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC1_START

NSPTOC2
BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC2_START

OR
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O NSPTOC_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2

GUID-1114A789-B912-4053-B00A-5DF48069E33F V1 EN

Figure 152: Negative-sequence overcurrent protection function

Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 protects for interruptions in the normal

three-phase load supply, for example, in downed conductor situations.

PDNSPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
START PDNSPTOC1_START

GUID-109761C8-E52A-43F5-B3D2-95C402F79515 V1 EN

Figure 153: Phase discontinuity protection

122 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

Two thermal overload protection functions are incorporated, one with one time
constant T1PTTR1 and other with two time constants T2PTTR1 for detecting
overloads under varying load conditions. The BLK_CLOSE output of the function is
used to block the closing operation of circuit breaker.

T1PTTR1
BLK_OPR OPERATE T1PTTR1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START T1PTTR1_START
TEMP_AMB ALARM T1PTTR1_ALARM
BLK_CLOSE T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

T2PTTR1
BLOCK OPERATE T2PTTR1_OPERATE
TEMP_AMB START T2PTTR1_START
ALARM T2PTTR1_ALARM
BLK_CLOSE T2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

GUID-98DD8187-875F-4B44-977C-3B4097DE9D25 V1 EN

Figure 154: Thermal overcurrent protection function

Three overvoltage and undervoltage protection stages PHPTOV and PHPTUV offer
protection against abnormal phase voltage conditions. However, only two instances of
PHPTOV and PHPTUV are used in the configuration. Positive-sequence
undervoltage PSPTUV and negative-sequence overvoltage NSPTOV protection
functions enable voltage-based unbalance protection. A failure in the voltage
measuring circuit is detected by the fuse failure function and the activation is
connected to block undervoltage protection functions and voltage based unbalance
protection functions to avoid faulty tripping.

PHPTOV1
BLOCK OPERATE PHPTOV1_OPERATE
START PHPTOV1_START

PHPTOV2
BLOCK OPERATE PHPTOV2_OPERATE
START PHPTOV2_START

OR
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O PHPTOV_OPERATE
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2

GUID-9C062068-BF92-419D-BF9B-23F1CADE7444 V2 EN

Figure 155: Overvoltage protection function

RED615 123
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

PHPTUV1
SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE PHPTUV1_OPERATE
START PHPTUV1_START

PHPTUV2
SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE PHPTUV2_OPERATE
START PHPTUV2_START

OR
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O PHPTUV_OPERATE
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2

GUID-57AFB769-5CB0-41B2-9360-F705B44B2B2B V3 EN

Figure 156: Undervoltage protection function

The residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV provides earth-fault protection by

detecting an abnormal level of residual voltage. It can be used, for example, as a
nonselective backup protection for the selective directional earth-fault functionality.

ROVPTOV1
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV1_START

ROVPTOV2
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV2_START

OR
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O ROVPTOV_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2

GUID-FBEA2623-82A1-4F1E-8AD8-FA4E958D3F18 V2 EN

Figure 157: Residual voltage protection function

NSPTOV1
SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOV1_OPERATE
START NSPTOV1_START

GUID-E1E4377A-82F7-4C71-BDC8-C5D680E824D8 V2 EN

Figure 158: Negative sequence overvoltage protection function

PSPTUV1
SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE PSPTUV1_OPERATE
START PSPTUV1_START

GUID-247948E4-57BB-4945-B6E9-85E149DED994 V2 EN

Figure 159: Positive sequence undervoltage protection function

124 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

The overcurrent protection, negative-sequence overcurrent

protection, phase discontinuity, earth-fault protection, residual
overvoltage protection, phase overvoltage and undervoltage
protection are all used as backup protection against line differential
protection.

The backup protection operated information is available at binary output X110:SO2

which can be used for external alarm purpose.

The optional autoreclosing function is configured to be initiated by operate signals

from a number of protection stages through the INIT_1...6 inputs. It is possible to
create individual autoreclose sequences for each input.

The autoreclosing function can be inhibited with the INHIBIT_RECL input. By

default, few selected protection function operations are connected to this input. A
control command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks the
autoreclosing function via the CBXCBR1-SELECTED signal.

The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosing sequence is expressed with the
CB_READY input in DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are connected
to the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open command from
the autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3, whereas close
command is connected directly to binary output X100:PO1.
DARREC1
OR6
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE INIT_1 OPEN_CB DARREC1_OPEN_CB
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B1 O PHIPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_2 CLOSE_CB DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2 DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE INIT_3 CMD_WAIT
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3 DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE INIT_4 INPRO DARREC1_INPRO
B4 INIT_5 LOCKED
B5 INIT_6 PROT_CRD
B6 DEL_INIT_2 UNSUC_RECL DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
OR6 X120_BI3_CB_OPENED CB_POS
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED CB_READY
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O INC_SHOTP
EFPADM3_OPERATE B2 INHIBIT_RECL
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3 RECL_ON
B4 SYNC
B5
B6

OR6
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B5
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM B6

GUID-94B242D2-EE8E-4E0B-B0D4-774317C8FC70 V1 EN

Figure 160: Autoreclosing function

Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by a
number of different protection functions available in the IED. The circuit breaker
failure protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuit
breaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.

The circuit breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET and
TRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker through
TRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output is used to give a backup trip to the breaker

RED615 125
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

feeding upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to the
binary output X100:PO2.

CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O START TRBU CCBRBRF1_TRBU
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 POSCLOSE TRRET CCBRBRF1_TRRET
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B3 B3 CB_FAULT
B4 B4
B5 B5
B6 B6

OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3
WPWDE3_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6

X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
GUID-527012AF-B080-4E51-BF8C-5888C2C4C4EA V1 EN

Figure 161: Circuit breaker failure protection function

The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip logics:
TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is available at
binary output X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are provided with a
lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal duration setting. If
the lockout operation mode is selected, binary input X110:BI1 can be assigned to
RST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external reset with a push button.

126 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

OR6 OR6 TRPPTRC1

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC1_TRIP
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B2 B2 OPERATE CL_LKOUT
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B3 B3 RST_LKOUT
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6

X110_BI1_RST_LOCKOUT
OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6

OR6
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
LNPLDF1_OPERATE B6

OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B4
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B5
B6

OR6
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B3
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B4
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B5
T2PTTR1_OPERATE B6

GUID-2C4612B0-8C10-4CF1-BD5F-39E0DCD01F9D V2 EN

Figure 162: Trip logic TRPPTRC1

RED615 127
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

OR6 OR6 TRPPTRC2

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC2_TRIP
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B2 B2 OPERATE CL_LKOUT
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B3 B3 RST_LKOUT
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6

X110_BI1_RST_LOCKOUT
OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6

OR6
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B6

OR6
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
CCBRBRF1_TRRET B2
WPWDE1_OPERATE B3
WPWDE2_OPERATE B4
WPWDE3_OPERATE B5
LNPLDF1_OPERATE B6

OR6
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B4
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B5
T2PTTR1_OPERATE B6

GUID-F3A60700-5E46-4F06-8D96-765FBCF5729E V2 EN

Figure 163: Trip logic TRPPTRC2

3.6.3.2 Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder

The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to trigger
the disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the disturbance
recorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the selected signals from
different functions and the few binary inputs are also connected to the disturbance
recorder.

128 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

RDRE1
OR6
LNPLDF1_START C1 TRIGGERED DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
DEFLPDEF1_START B1 O LNPLDF1_OPERATE C2
EFPADM1_START B2 PHIPTOC1_START C3
WPWDE1_START B3 DPHHPDOC1_START C4
B4 DPHLPDOC1_START C5
OR6 B5 DPHLPDOC2_START C6
B6 NSPTOC1_START C7
DEFLPDEF2_START B1 O NSPTOC2_START C8
EFPADM2_START B2 INTRPTEF1_START C9
WPWDE2_START B3 EFHPTOC1_START C10
B4 C11
B5 C12
B6 C13
PDNSPTOC1_START C14
T1PTTR1_START C15
OR6 T2PTTR1_START C16
PHPTOV1_START C17
OR6 PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O PHPTOV2_START C18
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B2 ROVPTOV1_START C19
DEFHPDEF1_START B1 O DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B3 ROVPTOV2_START C20
EFPADM3_START B2 DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B4 PSPTUV1_START C21
WPWDE3_START B3 B5 NSPTOV1_START C22
B4 B6 PHPTUV1_START C23
B5 PHPTUV2_START C24
B6 CCBRBRF1_TRRET C25
CCBRBRF1_TRBU C26
OR LNPLDF_RSTD2H C27
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE C28
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O C29
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 C30
OR6 INTRPTEF1_OPERATE C31
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE C32
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O C33
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2 PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE C34
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3 T1PTTR1_ALARM C35
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4 T2PTTR1_ALARM C36
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5 OR C37
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6 C38
B1 O C39
B2 C40
INRPHAR1_BLK2H C41
PCSITPC1_ALARM C42
OR6 CCSPVC1_FAIL C43
SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_3PH C44
B1 O OR SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U C45
WPWDE1_OPERATE B2 X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED C46
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3 PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM C47
WPWDE3_OPERATE B4 PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2 X120_BI3_CB_OPENED C48
B5 X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED C49
B6 X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING C50
C51
OR6 DARREC1_INPRO C52
C53
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O C54
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2 C55
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B3 C56
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B4 C57
B5 C58
B6 C59
OR C60
C61
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B1 O C62
T2PTTR1_OPERATE B2 C63
C64

OR
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2

OR
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B1 O
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL B2

GUID-66D3883A-0972-4CF4-B376-3C2B42AFA141 V3 EN

Figure 164: Disturbance recorder

3.6.3.3 Functional diagrams for condition monitoring

CCSPVC1 detects failures in the current measuring circuits. When a failure is

detected, it can be used to block the current protection functions that measures the
calculated sequence component currents or residual current to avoid unnecessary
operation.

CCSPVC1
BLOCK FAIL CCSPVC1_FAIL
ALARM CCSPVC1_ALARM

GUID-6D7C2FDE-A876-4ABA-B67D-C796339C0F96 V2 EN

Figure 165: Current circuit supervision function

Fuse failure supervision SEQSPVC1 detects failures in the voltage measurement

circuits at bus side. Failures, such as an open MCB, raise an alarm.

RED615 129
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

SEQSPVC1
BLOCK FUSEF_3PH SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_3PH
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED CB_CLOSED FUSEF_U SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST DISCON_OPEN
MINCB_OPEN

GUID-4A101AD2-2735-4154-9872-04E4AF5611C6 V2 EN

Figure 166: Fuse failure supervision function

The circuit breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR1 supervises the switch
status based on the connected binary input information and the measured current
levels. SSCBR1 introduces various supervision methods.

Set parameters for SSCBR1 properly.

SSCBR1
BLOCK TRV_T_OP_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN TRV_T_CL_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE SPR_CHR_ALM SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM
CB_OPEN_COMMAND OPEN_CB_EXE OPR_ALM SSCBR1_OPR_ALM
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND CLOSE_CB_EXE OPR_LO SSCBR1_OPR_LO
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM PRES_ALM_IN IPOW_ALM SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM
PRES_LO_IN IPOW_LO SSCBR1_IPOW_LO
CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED SPR_CHR_ST CB_LIFE_ALM SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED SPR_CHR MON_ALM SSCBR1_MON_ALM
RST_IPOW PRES_ALM SSCBR1_PRES_ALM
RST_CB_WEAR PRES_LO SSCBR1_PRES_LO
RST_TRV_T OPENPOS
RST_SPR_T INVALIDPOS
CLOSEPOS

GUID-5357065F-5B56-4478-831F-5F761EF68D8E V1 EN

Figure 167: Circuit breaker condition monitoring function

OR6
SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM B1 O
SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM B2
SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM B3
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM B4
SSCBR1_OPR_LO B5 OR
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM B6
B1 O SSCBR1_ALARMS
B2

OR6
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO B1 O
SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM B2
SSCBR1_MON_ALM B3
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM B4
SSCBR1_PRES_LO B5
B6

GUID-851424FB-003E-4B56-83F2-9D6DEB4FA8D8 V1 EN

Figure 168: Logic for circuit breaker monitoring alarm

NOT
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED IN OUT CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED

GUID-85AE4A88-0F81-4692-AB72-F76886830EDF V1 EN

Figure 169: Logic for start of circuit breaker spring charging

Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for power
output X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. The functions are
blocked by the master trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker open
signal.

130 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

It is assumed that there is no external resistor in the circuit breaker

tripping coil circuit connected in parallel with the circuit breaker
normally open auxiliary contact.

Set the parameters for TCSSCBR1 properly.

TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR1_ALARM

TCSSCBR2
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR2_ALARM

OR
TCSSCBR1_ALARM B1 O TCSSCBR_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2

GUID-62930E10-32E5-4921-90A5-054F5549A863 V1 EN

Figure 170: Trip circuit supervision function

OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B1 O TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-9DE42D33-5655-4E55-A2F2-0637375ED830 V1 EN

Figure 171: Logic for blocking of trip circuit supervision

Protection communication supervision PCSITPC is used in the configuration to block

the operation of the line differential function. This way, the malfunction of the line
differential is prevented. The activation of binary signal transfer outputs during the
protection communication failure is also blocked. These are done internally without
connections in the configurations. The protection communication supervision alarm
is connected to the alarm LED 4, disturbance recorder and binary output X100:SO2.

PCSITPC1
OK
WARNING
ALARM PCSITPC1_ALARM
COMM

GUID-58C48BE3-531B-44BE-A181-0E5F2CFDC098 V2 EN

Figure 172: Protection communication supervision function

RED615 131
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

The binary signal transfer function BSTGGIO is used for changing any binary
information which can be used for example, in protection schemes, interlocking and
alarms. There are eight separate inputs and corresponding outputs available.

In this configuration, one physical input X110:BI2 is connected to the binary signal
transfer channel one. Local feeder ready and local circuit breaker open information are
connected to the BSTGGIO inputs 6 and 7. This is interlocking information from
control logic. The information of detected current transformer fault is connected to
input 8.

As a consequence of sending interlocking information to remote end, also receiving of

same information locally is needed. Therefore, remote feeder ready, remote circuit
breaker open and remote current transformer failure are connected to the binary signal
transfer function outputs. The remote binary transfer output signal is connected to the
binary output X110:SO3.

BSTGGIO1
X110_BI2_BINARY_TRANSFER SEND_SIG_1 RECV_SIG_1 REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER
SEND_SIG_2 RECV_SIG_2
SEND_SIG_3 RECV_SIG_3
SEND_SIG_4 RECV_SIG_4
SEND_SIG_5 RECV_SIG_5
LOCAL_FEEDER_READY SEND_SIG_6 RECV_SIG_6 REMOTE_FEEDER_READY
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS SEND_SIG_7 RECV_SIG_7 REMOTE_CB_OPEN
CCSPVC1_FAIL SEND_SIG_8 RECV_SIG_8 REMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL
SEND_SIG_A BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_A
RECV_SIG_A BSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A

GUID-87A8E8D2-1554-4778-BF8C-B810F92C8F9E V2 EN

Figure 173: Binary signal transfer function

3.6.3.4 Functional diagrams for control and interlocking

Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.
DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 and
ESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in the
standard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing switch
status information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.

DCSXSWI1
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST POSOPEN OPENPOS
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS DCSXSWI1_OKPOS

GUID-E64DC447-49CC-4B85-9F45-22476C09D978 V1 EN

Figure 174: Disconnector 1 control logic

ESSXSWI1
X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED POSOPEN OPENPOS ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS

GUID-28CD15D7-2D66-449B-9268-129D9739D602 V1 EN

Figure 175: Earth-switch 1 control logic

132 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated. The
input can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of the
disconnector or circuit breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of the trip
logics and remote feeder position indication. Master trip logic, disconnector and
earth-switch statuses are local feeder ready information to be sent for the remote end.

The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or circuit breaker
truck is either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This, together with
the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-enable signal to
the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for circuit breaker is
always enabled.

If REMOTE_FEEDER_READY information is missing, for

example, in case of protection communication not connected, it
disables the circuit breaker closing in the local IED.

CBXCBR1
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN SELECTED CBXCBR1_SELECTED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE EXE_OP CBXCBR1_EXE_OP
TRUE ENA_OPEN EXE_CL CBXCBR1_EXE_CL
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE ENA_CLOSE OP_REQ
FALSE BLK_OPEN CL_REQ
CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE BLK_CLOSE OPENPOS CBXCBR1_OPENPOS
CBXCBR1_AU_OPEN AU_OPEN CLOSEPOS
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE AU_CLOSE OKPOS
TRIP OPEN_ENAD
SYNC_OK CLOSE_ENAD
SYNC_ITL_BYP

GUID-6C35F21A-59A7-4EA8-9A6B-6FF1195E2B9D V2 EN

Figure 176: Circuit breaker 1 control logic

Any additional signals required by the application can be connected

for opening and closing of circuit breaker.

OR
CBXCBR1_EXE_CL B1 O CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2

GUID-85700A51-C7A3-4CE2-82DD-BE499AED6BBA V1 EN

Figure 177: Signals for closing coil of circuit breaker 1

OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B1 O CB_OPEN_COMMAND
CBXCBR1_EXE_OP B2
DARREC1_OPEN_CB B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-BDEE048C-67D8-4979-B135-5CBEAE8EC89E V1 EN

Figure 178: Signals for opening coil of circuit breaker 1

RED615 133
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

AND
REMOTE_FEEDER_READY B1 O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
LOCAL_FEEDER_READY B2

AND6
DCSXSWI1_OKPOS B1 O LOCAL_FEEDER_READY
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS B2
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED B3
B4
NOT B5
B6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP IN OUT

NOT
TRPPTRC2_TRIP IN OUT

NOT
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM IN OUT

GUID-7A1BC865-FEEC-483B-902A-FA63B943377F V1 EN

Figure 179: Circuit breaker 1 close enable logic

Connect higher-priority conditions before enabling the circuit

breaker. These conditions cannot be bypassed with bypass feature of
the function.

OR6
T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE B1 O CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE
T2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-50A9F154-A417-4EF5-A3D8-41F165016CF6 V1 EN

Figure 180: Circuit breaker 1 close blocking logic

The configuration includes logic for generating circuit breaker external closing and
opening command with the IED in local or remote mode.

Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command and
modify it according to the application.

Connect the additional signals for closing and opening of the circuit
breaker in local or remote mode, if applicable for the application.

AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2

GUID-F4165FE3-89D0-442D-AE06-DE100001A9F8 V1 EN

Figure 181: External closing command for circuit breaker 1

134 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2

GUID-234BEA35-18B0-41CA-9B82-F7F4F098DBA7 V1 EN

Figure 182: External opening command for circuit breaker 1

3.6.3.5 Functional diagrams for measurement functions

The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase current
measurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card in
the back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the sequence
current and the residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures the residual
current.

The three-phase bus side phase voltage inputs to the IED are measured by three-phase
voltage measurement VMMXU1. The voltage input is connected to the X130 card in
the back panel. The sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 measures the sequence
voltage and the residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1 measures the residual
voltage.

The measurements can be seen in the LHMI and they are available under the
measurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks can
generate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the measured
current values.

The frequency measurement FMMXU1 of the power system and the three-phase
power and energy measurement PEMMXU1 are available. Load profile record
LDPRLRC1 is included in the measurements sheet. LDPRLRC1 offers the ability to
observe the loading history of the corresponding feeder.

CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM

GUID-D90049A9-79DB-4509-8FCF-698EA072ED0C V1 EN

Figure 183: Current measurement: Three-phase current measurement

CSMSQI1

GUID-B673B40B-4BC5-4B68-A9EA-D7B775EDDE1B V1 EN

Figure 184: Current measurement: Sequence current measurement

RED615 135
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN

GUID-5F19BB51-E128-4264-92CE-80919279D13C V1 EN

Figure 185: Current measurement: Residual current measurement

VMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM

GUID-185F1398-111B-4110-A7EF-A3DA5C402034 V1 EN

Figure 186: Voltage measurement: Three-phase voltage measurement

VSMSQI1

GUID-DC4A3CBE-B6FD-4010-BA67-57D51816E5A2 V1 EN

Figure 187: Voltage measurement: Sequence voltage measurement

RESVMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN

GUID-67A789F2-B77F-42BD-8137-0AC44E5FF554 V1 EN

Figure 188: Voltage measurement: Residual voltage measurement

FMMXU1

GUID-5273D289-0FE3-47D3-B57A-0BA22B5EC842 V1 EN

Figure 189: Other measurement: Frequency measurement

PEMMXU1
RSTACM

GUID-D2FA74CF-B6E0-46F7-80D8-AEAE9B36A063 V1 EN

Figure 190: Other measurement: Three-phase power and energy measurement

FLTRFRC1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD

GUID-2FC37793-AF71-4854-A84A-70CCEEA56E32 V2 EN

Figure 191: Other measurement: Data monitoring

LDPRLRC1
RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM

GUID-668FDBE4-A071-4F49-9142-2BCA9129622B V2 EN

Figure 192: Other measurement: Load profile record

136 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

3.6.3.6 Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs

X110_BI1_RST_LOCKOUT
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 1

X110_BI2_BINARY_TRANSFER
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2

X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3

X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4

X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5

X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6

X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7

X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8
GUID-F761D951-A662-402A-B61A-D9E5FBCAA3F4 V1 EN

Figure 193: Binary inputs - X110 terminal block

X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 1

X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 2

X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 3
GUID-8E0F1D9B-9E5C-405E-B22A-0E5535EDF43D V1 EN

Figure 194: Binary inputs - X120 terminal block

UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKING
X110 (BIO).X110-SO1

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO2

REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER
X110 (BIO).X110-SO3
GUID-299FE861-9452-4002-A3E6-18ADD61E3FE4 V1 EN

Figure 195: Binary outputs - X110 terminal block

RED615 137
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1

CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2

DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1

LNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2

CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3

TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
GUID-EE457369-A302-45CC-94F4-C44D0CD0A08C V1 EN

Figure 196: Binary outputs - X100 terminal block

138 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

LED1
OK
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE ALARM
RESET

LED2
OK
LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE ALARM
RESET

LED3
OK
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE ALARM
RESET

LED4
OK
PCSITPC1_ALARM ALARM
RESET

LED5
OK
DARREC1_INPRO ALARM
RESET

GUID-A1199E6D-B317-495E-B6D9-B083279F43D8 V2 EN

RED615 139
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

LED6
OR6
OK
T1PTTR1_ALARM B1 O ALARM
T2PTTR1_ALARM B2 RESET
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

LED7
OK
CCBRBRF1_TRBU ALARM
RESET

LED8
OK
DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED ALARM
RESET

LED9
OR6
OK
TCSSCBR_ALARM B1 O ALARM
SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_3PH B2 RESET
SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U B3
CCSPVC1_ALARM B4
SSCBR1_ALARMS B5
B6

LED10
OK
BSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A ALARM
RESET

LED11
OK
BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_A ALARM
RESET

GUID-76D5018B-613B-4D92-B646-A53D972CDB0F V2 EN

Figure 197: Default LED connection

3.6.3.7 Functional diagrams for other timer logics

The configuration also includes line differential operate, inactive communication and
backup protection operate logic. The operate logics are connected to minimum pulse
timer TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output
from TPGAPC1 is connected to the binary outputs.

OR
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE B1 O
LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE B2 TPGAPC1
IN1 OUT1 DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSE
IN2 OUT2 LNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM

OR
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE B1 O
PCSITPC1_ALARM B2

GUID-3CDDEC1A-AAFA-46E2-8EC0-02005DEE2C07 V2 EN

Figure 198: Timer logic for differential operate and communication not active

140 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

TPGAPC2
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE IN1 OUT1 BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE
IN2 OUT2

OR6
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B1 O BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE
NSPTOC_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
OR6
DPHxPDOC_OPERATE B1 O
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE B2
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B3
EFPADM_OPERATE B4
WPWDE_OPERATE B5
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B6

OR6
FREQUENCY_OPEATE B1 O
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B3
PHPTOV_OPERATE B4
PHPTUV_OPERATE B5
B6

GUID-39193B88-CF7E-4808-8C0C-3F9F3281AA8A V1 EN

Figure 199: Timer logic for backup protection operate pulse

3.6.3.8 Other functions

The configuration includes few instances of multipurpose protection MAPGAPC,

fault locator, harmonics-based earth-fault protection, high-impedance fault detection
function PHIZ, runtime counter for machines and devices MDSOPT and different
types of timers and control functions. These functions are not included in application
configuration but they can be added based on the system requirements.

3.7 Standard configuration E

3.7.1 Applications
The standard configuration with directional overcurrent and directional earth-fault
protection, phase-voltage and frequency based protection is mainly intended for cable
feeder applications in distribution networks. The standard configuration for line
current differential protection includes support for in-zone transformers. The
configuration also includes additional options to select earth-fault protection based on
admittance, wattmetric or harmonic principle.

Standard configuration E is not designed for using all the available functionality
content in one relay at the same time. Frequency protection functions and third
instances of voltage protection functions must be added with the Application

RED615 141
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

Configuration tool. To ensure the performance of the relay, the user-specific

configuration load is verified with the Application Configuration tool in PCM600.

The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with default
settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing and internal
signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be further adapted to
different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs by modifying the
internal functionality using PCM600.

142 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

3.7.2 Functions

RED615 LINE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION AND CONTROL RELAY

With in-zone power transformer support
STANDARD
CONFIGURATION
E
IEC 61850-9-2LE

PROTECTION LOCAL HMI ALSO AVAILABLE

- Binary Signal Transfer function (BST)

2 - Disturbance and fault recorder
Master Trip
- Event log and recorded data
Conguration A
System

Lockout relay
HMI
Time
Authorization

- Local/Remote push button on LHMI

94/86 I ESC Clear
- Self-supervision
- Time synchronization: IEEE 1588 v2,
A
O R
L
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr SNTP, IRIG-B
- User management
IL2 0 A

2 - Web HMI
I2> I2/I1> 3Ith>F I ESC Clear

AND
3I 46 46PD 49F
O R
L
OR

3Ith>T/G/C 3I>>>
49T/G/C 50P/51P
CONDITION MONITORING COMMUNICATION
AND SUPERVISION
2 Protocols:
3I>/Io>BF 3I> 3I>>
IEC 61850-8-1
51BF/51NBF 67-1 67-2
IEC 61850-9-2LE
UL1UL2UL3 Io Modbus
IEC 60870-5-103
3I2f> 3dI>L 3I FUSEF CBCM MCS 3I DNP3
68 87L 60 CBCM MCS 3I Interfaces:
Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC)
Serial: Serial glass ber (ST),
RS-485, RS-232
2 2 Redundant protocols:
Io Io> Io>> BST OPTS PCS TCS HSR
67N-1 67N-2 BST OPTM PCS TCM PRP
RSTP

CONTROL AND INDICATION 1) MEASUREMENT

Io>>
51N-2 - I, U, Io, Uo, P, Q, E, pf, f
Io Object Ctrl 2) Ind 3) - Limit value supervision
CB 1 - - Load prole record
- Symmetrical components
3 3 DC 2 3
Io>IEF Yo> Po> Io>HA Analog interface types 1)
ES 1 2
67NIEF 21YN 32N 51NHA Current sensor 3
1)
Check availability of binary inputs/outputs
OR OR from technical documentation Voltage sensor 3
2)
Control and indication function for
primary object Current transformer 1
Uo 3)
Status indication function for
UL1UL2UL3

1)
Combi sensor inputs with conventional
primary object
Io input

3 3
3U< U2> U1< 3U> SYNC OI PQM3I PQM3U PQMU
27 47O- 47U+ 59 25 79 PQM3I PQM3V PQMV
UL1
3 4
Uo> f>/f<, PQUUB
df/dt
59G PQVUB
81

18
FLOC MAP SOTF REMARKS
21FL MAP SOTF Optional 3 No. of Calculated OR Alternative
function instances value function to be
Io/Uo dened when
3I ordering

RED615
AT REMOTE
END

GUID-D0C7BD80-3FC0-448D-ACD4-D6123319339C V2 EN

Figure 200: Functionality overview for standard configuration E

3.7.2.1 Default I/O connections

Connector pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physical
connections section.

RED615 143
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

Table 31: Default connections for binary inputs

BIO card Description
X110-BI1 Circuit breaker plug not inserted
X110-BI2 Circuit breaker spring charged
X110-BI3 Circuit breaker in opened position
X110-BI4 Circuit breaker closed position
X110-BI5 Circuit breaker truck in test
X110-BI6 Circuit breaker truck in service
X110-BI7 Earthing switch in opened position
X110-BI8 Earthing switch in closed position

Table 32: Default connections for binary outputs

Binary input Description
X100-PO1 Release for circuit breaker closing
X100-PO2 Circuit breaker closed command
X100-SO1 Release for circuit breaker truck
X100-SO2 Release for earthing switch
X100-PO3 Circuit breaker open command
X100-PO4 Circuit breaker failed signal - Retrip
X110- SO1 -
X110- SO2 -
X110- SO3 -
X110- SO4 -

Table 33: Default connections for LEDs

LED Description
1 Circuit breaker close enabled
2 Overcurrent protection operated
3 Earth-fault protection operated
4 Line differential protection instantaneous stage operated
5 Line differential protection biased stage operated
6 Thermal protection
7 Line differential protection not active
8 Protection communication supervision alarm
9 Supervision alarm
10 Circuit breaker monitoring alarm
11 -

144 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

3.7.2.2 Default disturbance recorder settings

Table 34: Default disturbance recorder analog channels
Channel Description
1 IL1
2 IL2
3 IL3
4 Io
5 Uo
6 U1
7 U2
8 U3
9 -
10 -
11 -
12 -

Table 35: Default disturbance recorder binary channels

Channel ID text Level trigger mode
1 LNPLDF1 - start Positive or Rising
2 LNPLDF1 - operate Positive or Rising
3 PHIPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
4 DPHHPDOC1 - start Positive or Rising
5 DPHLPDOC1 - start Positive or Rising
6 DPHLPDOC2 - start Positive or Rising
7 NSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
8 NSPTOC2 - start Positive or Rising
9 INTRPTEF1 - start Positive or Rising
10 EFHPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
11 DEFLPDEF1 - start Positive or Rising
WPWDE1 - start
EFPADM1 - start
12 DEFLPDEF2 - start Positive or Rising
WPWDE2 - start
EFPADM2 - start
13 DEFHPDEF1 - start Positive or Rising
WPWDE3 - start
EFPADM3 - start
14 PDNSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
15 T1PTTR1 - start Positive or Rising
Table continues on next page

RED615 145
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

Channel ID text Level trigger mode

16 T2PTTR1 - start Positive or Rising
17 PHPTOV1 - start Positive or Rising
18 PHPTOV2 - start Positive or Rising
20 ROVPTOV1 - start Positive or Rising
21 ROVPTOV2 - start Positive or Rising
23 PSPTUV1 - start Positive or Rising
24 NSPTOV1 - start Positive or Rising
25 PHPTUV1 - start Positive or Rising
26 PHPTUV2 - start Positive or Rising
32 CCBRBRF1 - trret Level trigger off
33 CCBRBRF1 - trbu Level trigger off
34 LNPLDF1 - rstd2h Level trigger off
35 LNPLDF1 - prot not active Level trigger off
36 PHIPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
DPHHPDOC1 - operate
DPHLPDOC1 - operate
DPHLPDOC2 - operate
37 NSPTOC1 - operater Level trigger off
NSPTOC2 - operate
38 INTRPTEF1 - operate Level trigger off
39 EFHPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
40 DEFLPDEF1 - operate Level trigger off
WPWDE1 - operate
EFPADM1 - operate
DEFLPDEF2 - operate
WPWDE2 - operate
EFPADM2 - operate
DEFLPDEF3 - operate
WPWDE3 - operate
EFPADM3 - operate
41 PDNSPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
42 T1PTTR1 - alarm Level trigger off
43 T2PTTR2 - alarm Level trigger off
44 PHPTOV1 - operate Level trigger off
PHPTOV2 - operate
45 ROVPTOV1 - operate Level trigger off
ROVPTOV2 - operate
PSPTUV1 - operate
NSPTOV1 - operate
Table continues on next page

146 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

Channel ID text Level trigger mode

46 T1PTTR1 - operate Level trigger off
T2PTTR2 - operate
47 PHPTUV1 - operate Level trigger off
PHPTUV2 - operate
49 INRPHAR1 - blk2h Level trigger off
50 PCSITPC1 - alarm Level trigger off
51 CCSPVC1 - alarm Level trigger off
52 X110BI2 - CB spring discharged Level trigger off
53 X110BI3 - CB opened Level trigger off
54 X110BI4 - CB closed Level trigger off
55 DARREC1 - unsuc recl Level trigger off
DARREC1 - close CB
56 DARREC1 - inpro Level trigger off
57 General start pulse Level trigger off
58 General operate pulse Level trigger off

3.7.3 Functional diagrams

The functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and function-
to-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed with
PCM600 according to the application requirements.

The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside the
IEDs standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels available for the
disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbance
recorders parameter settings.

The phase currents to the IED are fed from Rogowski or Combi sensors. The residual
current to the IED is fed from either residually connected CTs, an external core
balance CT, neutral CT or internally calculated.

The phase voltages to the IED are fed from Combi sensors. The residual voltage is
calculated internally.

RED615 offers six different settings group which can be set based on individual
needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting group settings
available in RED615.

Depending on the communication protocol the required function block needs to be

instantiated in the configuration.

RED615 147
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

3.7.3.1 Functional diagrams for protection

The functional diagrams describe the IEDs protection functionality in detail and
according to the factory set default connections.

Line differential protection with in-zone power transformer LNPLDF1 is intended to

be the main protection offering exclusive unit protection for the power distribution
lines or cables. The stabilized low stage can be blocked if the current transformer
failure is detected. The operate value of the instantaneous high stage can be multiplied
by predefined settings if the ENA_MULT_HS input is activated. In this configuration,
it is activated by the open status information of the remote-end circuit breaker and
earth switch, and if the disconnector is not in the intermediate state. The intention of
this connection is to lower the setting value of the instantaneous high stage by
multiplying with setting High Op value Mult, in case of internal fault.
LNPLDF1
OR
BLOCK OPERATE LNPLDF1_OPERATE
CCSPVC1_FAIL B1 O BLOCK_LS START LNPLDF1_START
REMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL B2 ENA_MULT_HS STR_LS_LOC
STR_LS_REM
OPR_LS_LOC LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC
OPR_LS_REM LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM
OPR_HS_LOC LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC
OR OPR_HS_REM LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM
BLKD2H_LOC LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC
REMOTE_FEEDER_READY B1 O BLKD2H_REM LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM
REMOTE_CB_OPEN B2 PRO_ACTIVE LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

OR
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC B1 O LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM B2

NOT
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE IN OUT LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

OR
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC B1 O LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM B2

OR
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC B1 O LNPLDF_BLKD2H
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM B2

GUID-87CBED03-0383-4BE8-854E-F7D5F538EA21 V2 EN

Figure 201: Line differential protection functions

Four overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit protection. Three
of them include directional functionality DPHxPDOC. Three-phase non-directional
overcurrent protection, instantaneous stage, PHIPTOC1 is blocked when line
differential is active.

148 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

PHIPTOC1
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE BLOCK OPERATE PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
INRPHAR1_BLK2H ENA_MULT START PHIPTOC1_START

DPHHPDOC1
BLOCK OPERATE DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DPHHPDOC1_START
NON_DIR

DPHLPDOC1
BLOCK OPERATE DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DPHLPDOC1_START
NON_DIR

DPHLPDOC2
BLOCK OPERATE DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DPHLPDOC2_START
NON_DIR

OR6
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B1 O DPHxPDOC_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B2
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-866A9329-0726-48E5-B316-BE9FAC9C3BFE V1 EN

Figure 202: Overcurrent protection functions

Three stages are provided for directional earth-fault protection. According to the
IED's order code, the directional earth-fault protection method can be based on
conventional directional earth-fault DEFxPDEF only or alternatively together with
admittance-based earth-fault protection EFPADM, wattmetric-based earth-fault
protection WPWDE or harmonics-based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC. In
addition, there is a dedicated protection stage INTRPTEF either for transient-based
earth-fault protection or for cable intermittent earth-fault protection in compensated
networks.

RED615 149
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

DEFHPDEF1
BLOCK OPERATE DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFHPDEF1_START
RCA_CTL

DEFLPDEF1
BLOCK OPERATE DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFLPDEF1_START
RCA_CTL

DEFLPDEF2
BLOCK OPERATE DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFLPDEF2_START
RCA_CTL

OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O DEFxPDEF_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-83E3A3E3-FA76-4A2F-A347-E49A5D2BA786 V1 EN

Figure 203: Directional earth-fault protection function

INTRPTEF1
BLOCK OPERATE INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
START INTRPTEF1_START
BLK_EF

GUID-31918CB0-4497-4D34-8A94-D6E9B9B9E802 V1 EN

Figure 204: Transient/intermittent earth-fault protection function

150 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

WPWDE1
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE1_OPERATE
RCA_CTL START WPWDE1_START

WPWDE2
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE2_OPERATE
RCA_CTL START WPWDE2_START

WPWDE3
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE3_OPERATE
RCA_CTL START WPWDE3_START

OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O WPWDE_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-03F7F19D-876F-4442-B033-BB7B193A944C V1 EN

Figure 205: Wattmetric earth-fault protection function

EFPADM1
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM1_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM1_START

EFPADM2
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM2_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM2_START

EFPADM3
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM3_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM3_START

OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE B1 O EFPADM_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2
EFPADM3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-FDCDC5B3-335E-41CB-97E5-F481B5E0F5AF V1 EN

Figure 206: Admittance-based earth-fault protection function

RED615 151
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

Non-directional (cross-country) earth-fault protection, using calculated Io,

EFHPTOC1 protects against double earth-fault situations in isolated or compensated
networks. This protection function uses the calculated residual current originating
from the phase currents.

EFHPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFHPTOC1_START

GUID-101DFCBD-67C7-4002-941B-E0F5C338ECD0 V1 EN

Figure 207: Earth-fault protection function

The output BLK2H of three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 offers the possibility to
either block the function or multiply the active settings for any of the available
overcurrent function blocks.

INRPHAR1
BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H

GUID-0EF609AC-09A6-4B16-93C7-FAD1B59CE0EB V1 EN

Figure 208: Inrush detector function

Two negative-sequence overcurrent protection stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 are

provided for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect the
feeder against phase unbalance. The function is blocked on detection of failure in
current secondary circuit.

NSPTOC1
CCSPVC1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC1_START

NSPTOC2
CCSPVC1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC2_START

OR
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O NSPTOC_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2

GUID-2C582C54-8D7E-413A-8A4B-52EA6F7962E1 V2 EN

Figure 209: Negative sequence overcurrent protection function

Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 protects for interruptions in the normal

three-phase load supply, for example, in downed conductor situations.

152 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

PDNSPTOC1
CCSPVC1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
START PDNSPTOC1_START

GUID-B4D669EF-FBC3-4722-AD3C-E4ED6A5F5407 V2 EN

Figure 210: Phase discontinuity protection function

Two thermal overload protection functions are incorporated one with one time
constant T1PTTR1 and other with two time constants T2PTTR1 for detecting
overloads under varying load conditions. The BLK_CLOSE output of the function is
used to block the closing operation of circuit breaker.

T1PTTR1
BLK_OPR OPERATE T1PTTR1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START T1PTTR1_START
TEMP_AMB ALARM T1PTTR1_ALARM
BLK_CLOSE T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

T2PTTR1
BLOCK OPERATE T2PTTR1_OPERATE
TEMP_AMB START T2PTTR1_START
ALARM T2PTTR1_ALARM
BLK_CLOSE T2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

GUID-DD8DF01A-3462-4564-8AD2-C8C8ADF991AD V1 EN

Figure 211: Thermal overcurrent protection function

Three overvoltage and undervoltage protection stages PHPTOV and PHPTUV offer
protection against abnormal phase voltage conditions. However, only two instances of
PHPTOV and PHPTUV are used in the configuration. Positive-sequence
undervoltage PSPTUV and negative-sequence overvoltage NSPTOV protection
functions enable voltage-based unbalance protection.

PHPTOV1 PHPTUV1
BLOCK OPERATE PHPTOV1_OPERATE BLOCK OPERATE PHPTUV1_OPERATE
START PHPTOV1_START START PHPTUV1_START

PHPTOV2 PHPTUV2
BLOCK OPERATE PHPTOV2_OPERATE BLOCK OPERATE PHPTUV2_OPERATE
START PHPTOV2_START START PHPTUV2_START

GUID-FD2018DA-06D2-43A2-B1B9-C304150ED9AD V2 EN

Figure 212: Overvoltage and undervoltage protection function

Residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV provides earth-fault protection by

detecting abnormal level of residual voltage. It can be used, for example, as a
nonselective backup protection for the selective directional earth-fault functionality.

RED615 153
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

ROVPTOV1
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV1_START

ROVPTOV2
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV2_START

GUID-50003B1E-3AF3-4A9C-8DC4-B24FB1437AE3 V2 EN

Figure 213: Residual overvoltage protection function

NSPTOV1
BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOV1_OPERATE
START NSPTOV1_START

GUID-77086659-9F8C-4D9B-A321-D477719D4E38 V1 EN

Figure 214: Negative sequence overvoltage protection function

PSPTUV1
BLOCK OPERATE PSPTUV1_OPERATE
START PSPTUV1_START

GUID-D945E695-E908-43EC-85DA-0B0DAD3EEB0D V1 EN

Figure 215: Positive sequence undervoltage protection function

The optional autoreclosing function is configured to be initiated by operate signals

from a number of protection stages through the INIT_1...6 inputs. It is possible to
create individual autoreclose sequences for each input.

The autoreclosing function can be inhibited with the INHIBIT_RECL input. By

default, few selected protection function operations are connected to this input. A
control command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks the
autoreclosing function via the CBXCBR1-SELECTED signal.

The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosing sequence is expressed with the
CB_READY input in DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are connected
to the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open command from
the autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3, whereas close
command is connected directly to binary output X100:PO1.

154 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

DARREC1
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE INIT_1 OPEN_CB DARREC1_OPEN_CB
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_2 CLOSE_CB DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
OR6 DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE INIT_3 CMD_WAIT
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE INIT_4 INPRO DARREC1_INPRO
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B1 O INIT_5 LOCKED
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2 INIT_6 PROT_CRD
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3 DEL_INIT_2 UNSUC_RECL DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
B4 DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
B5 DEL_INIT_4 READY
B6 BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
X110_BI3_CB_OPENED CB_POS
CBXCBR1_CLOSE_ENAD CB_READY
INC_SHOTP
OR6 INHIBIT_RECL
RECL_ON
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O SYNC
EFPADM3_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

OR6
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B5
B6

GUID-CFECED4C-F593-4C8C-AF46-3677D75DF1C4 V1 EN

Figure 216: Autoreclosing function

Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by a
number of different protection functions available in the IED. The circuit breaker
failure protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuit
breaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.

The circuit breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET and
TRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker through
TRPPTRC2_TRIP. The same TRRET output is also connected to the binary output
X100:PO4.
CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O START TRBU CCBRBRF1_TRBU
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 POSCLOSE TRRET CCBRBRF1_TRRET
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B3 B3 CB_FAULT
B4 B4
B5 B5
B6 B6

OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3
WPWDE3_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6

X110_BI4_CB_CLOSED

GUID-5A56DA6F-3B22-4867-B935-AC209B7A8122 V1 EN

Figure 217: Circuit breaker failure protection function

General start and operate from all the functions are connected to minimum pulse timer
TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output from
TPGAPC1 can be connected to binary outputs.

RED615 155
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

OR6 OR6 TPGAPC4

PHIPTOC1_START B1 O B1 O IN1 OUT1 GENERAL_START_PULSE
DPHLPDOC1_START B2 B2 IN2 OUT2 GENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE
DPHLPDOC2_START B3 B3
DPHHPDOC1_START B4 B4
NSPTOC1_START B5 B5
NSPTOC2_START B6 B6

OR6 OR6
OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O
DEFHPDEF1_START B1 O DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B2 B2
DEFLPDEF1_START B2 DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
DEFLPDEF2_START B3 DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
EFPADM1_START B4 NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
EFPADM2_START B5 NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
EFPADM3_START B6

OR6
OR6 DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2
INTRPTEF1_START B1 O DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3
EFHPTOC1_START B2 EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
PDNSPTOC1_START B3 EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV1_START B4 EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
ROVPTOV2_START B5
B6

OR6
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B1 O
OR6 EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
NSPTOV1_START B1 O ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
WPWDE1_START B2 ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
WPWDE2_START B3 B6
WPWDE3_START B4
PSPTUV1_START B5
PHPTOV1_START B6

OR6
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE1_OPERATE B2
OR6 WPWDE2_OPERATE B3
WPWDE3_OPERATE B4
PHPTOV2_START B1 O PSPTUV1_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV1_START B2 PHPTOV1_OPERATE B6
PHPTUV2_START B3
T1PTTR1_START B4
T2PTTR1_START B5
LNPLDF1_START B6
OR6
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B2
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B3
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B4
T2PTTR1_OPERATE B5
LNPLDF1_OPERATE B6

GUID-C7D2F9C8-CBC9-4588-BBEF-80C90BDF6473 V2 EN

Figure 218: General start and operate signals

The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip logics:
TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output from TRPPTRC1 trip logic functions is
available at binary output X100:PO3. The trip logic functions are provided with a
lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal duration setting. If
the lockout operation mode is required, binary input can be assigned to RST_LKOUT
input of the trip logic to enable external reset with a push button.

156 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

OR6 OR6 TRPPTRC1

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC1_TRIP
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B2 B2 OPERATE CL_LKOUT
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B3 B3 RST_LKOUT
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6

OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6

OR6
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
LNPLDF1_OPERATE B6

OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B4
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B5
B6

OR6
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B3
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B4
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B5
T2PTTR1_OPERATE B6

GUID-32B07A1D-B7F6-479D-BF3B-3BB5331A863F V2 EN

Figure 219: Trip logic TRPPTRC1

RED615 157
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

OR6 OR6 TRPPTRC2

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC2_TRIP
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B2 B2 OPERATE CL_LKOUT
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B3 B3 RST_LKOUT
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6

OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6

OR6
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
LNPLDF1_OPERATE B6

OR6
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
CCBRBRF1_TRRET B2
WPWDE1_OPERATE B3
WPWDE2_OPERATE B4
WPWDE3_OPERATE B5
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B6

OR6
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B4
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B5
T2PTTR1_OPERATE B6

GUID-748AFA48-FAB3-46D7-A9E6-6631028E297F V2 EN

Figure 220: Trip logic TRPPTRC2

3.7.3.2 Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder

The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to trigger
the disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the disturbance
recorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the selected signals from
different functions and the few binary inputs are also connected to the disturbance
recorder.

Once the order of signals connected to binary inputs of RDRE is

changed, make the changes to parameter setting tool.

158 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

RDRE1
OR6 LNPLDF1_START C1 TRIGGERED
LNPLDF1_OPERATE C2
DEFLPDEF1_START B1 O PHIPTOC1_START C3
EFPADM1_START B2 DPHHPDOC1_START C4
WPWDE1_START B3 DPHLPDOC1_START C5
B4 OR6 DPHLPDOC2_START C6
B5 NSPTOC1_START C7
B6 DEFLPDEF2_START B1 O NSPTOC2_START C8
EFPADM2_START B2 INTRPTEF1_START C9
WPWDE2_START B3 EFHPTOC1_START C10
B4 C11
B5 C12
OR6 B6 C13
PDNSPTOC1_START C14
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O T1PTTR1_START C15
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B2 T2PTTR1_START C16
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B3 PHPTOV1_START C17
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B4 OR6 PHPTOV2_START C18
B5 ROVPTOV1_START C19
B6 DEFHPDEF1_START B1 O ROVPTOV2_START C20
EFPADM3_START B2 PSPTUV1_START C21
WPWDE3_START B3 NSPTOV1_START C22
B4 PHPTUV1_START C23
B5 PHPTUV2_START C24
B6 CCBRBRF1_TRRET C25
CCBRBRF1_TRBU C26
OR LNPLDF_BLKD2H C27
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE C28
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O C29
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 C30
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE C31
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE C32
C33
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE C34
OR6 OR T1PTTR1_ALARM C35
T2PTTR1_ALARM C36
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O C37
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2 B2 C38
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3 C39
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4 C40
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5 INRPHAR1_BLK2H C41
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6 PCSITPC1_ALARM C42
CCSPVC1_FAIL C43
OR X110_BI2_CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED C44
X110_BI3_CB_OPENED C45
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O X110_BI4_CB_CLOSED C46
OR6 PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2 C47
DARREC1_INPRO C48
B1 O GENERAL_START_PULSE C49
WPWDE1_OPERATE B2 GENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE C50
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3 C51
WPWDE3_OPERATE B4 OR6 C52
B5 C53
B6 ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O C54
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2 C55
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B3 C56
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B4 C57
B5 C58
B6 C59
OR C60
C61
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O C62
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2 C63
C64

OR
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B1 O
T2PTTR1_OPERATE B2

OR
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B1 O
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL B2

GUID-2B380C77-3B2C-4788-8BEC-D1A60316C6F8 V3 EN

Figure 221: Disturbance recorder

3.7.3.3 Functional diagrams for condition monitoring

CCSPVC1 detects failures in the current measuring circuits. When a failure is

detected, it can be used to block the current protection functions that measures the
calculated sequence component currents or residual current to avoid unnecessary
operation.

RED615 159
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

CCSPVC1
BLOCK FAIL CCSPVC1_FAIL
ALARM CCSPVC1_ALARM

GUID-7544D1F4-3408-4871-BDBD-CD69DE9A2F35 V2 EN

Figure 222: Current circuit supervision function

Circuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR1 supervises the switch status based on

the connected binary input information and the measured current levels. SSCBR1
introduces various supervision methods.

Set the parameters for SSCBR1 properly.

SSCBR1
BLOCK TRV_T_OP_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM
X110_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN TRV_T_CL_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM
X110_BI4_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE SPR_CHR_ALM SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM
CB_OPEN_COMMAND OPEN_CB_EXE OPR_ALM SSCBR1_OPR_ALM
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND CLOSE_CB_EXE OPR_LO SSCBR1_OPR_LO
PRES_ALM_IN IPOW_ALM SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM
PRES_LO_IN IPOW_LO SSCBR1_IPOW_LO
X110_BI2_CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED SPR_CHR_ST CB_LIFE_ALM SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
CB_SPRING_CHARGED SPR_CHR MON_ALM SSCBR1_MON_ALM
RST_IPOW PRES_ALM SSCBR1_PRES_ALM
RST_CB_WEAR PRES_LO SSCBR1_PRES_LO
RST_TRV_T OPENPOS
RST_SPR_T INVALIDPOS
CLOSEPOS

GUID-99741CF0-7D88-4AAA-84EF-61E7DC4CBC2A V1 EN

Figure 223: Circuit breaker condition monitoring function

OR6
SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM B1 O
SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM B2
SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM B3
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM B4
SSCBR1_OPR_LO B5 OR
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM B6
B1 O SSCBR1_ALARMS
B2

OR6
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO B1 O
SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM B2
SSCBR1_MON_ALM B3
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM B4
SSCBR1_PRES_LO B5
B6

GUID-B6B90A88-8924-4B32-8F2A-DEF3931388FA V1 EN

Figure 224: Logic for circuit breaker monitoring alarm

NOT
X110_BI2_CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED IN OUT CB_SPRING_CHARGED

GUID-FA20C086-8CA5-4430-B18F-1FB631480979 V1 EN

Figure 225: Logic for start of circuit breaker spring charging

Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for power
output X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. The functions are
blocked by both the master trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the binary input
X110:BI1 indicating the IED plug out.

160 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

It is assumed that there is external resistor in the circuit breaker

tripping coil circuit connected in parallel with the circuit breaker
normally open auxiliary contact.

Set the parameters for TCSSCBR1 properly.

TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR1_ALARM

TCSSCBR2
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR2_ALARM

OR
TCSSCBR1_ALARM B1 O TCSSCBR_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2

GUID-D5151801-2495-4DF2-A362-F7CB9AE1AFC0 V1 EN

Figure 226: Trip circuit supervision function

OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B1 O TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
X110_BI1_PLUG_OUT B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-7EA01D36-6EB3-41C3-AC1B-CB3536E444C0 V1 EN

Figure 227: Logic for blocking of trip circuit supervision

Protection communication supervision PCSITPC1 is used in the configuration to

block the operation of the line differential function. This way, the malfunction of the
line differential is prevented. The activation of binary signal transfer outputs during
the protection communication failure is also blocked. These are done internally
without connections in the configurations. The protection communication supervision
alarm is connected to the alarm LED 4, disturbance recorder and binary output
X100:SO2.

PCSITPC1
OK
WARNING
ALARM PCSITPC1_ALARM
COMM

GUID-D1562A57-E53D-43C7-BC28-A7E27E95C11A V2 EN

Figure 228: Protection communication supervision function

RED615 161
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

The binary signal transfer function BSTGGIO is used for changing any binary
information which can be used for example, in protection schemes, interlocking and
alarms. There are eight separate inputs and corresponding outputs available.

In this configuration, local feeder ready and local circuit breaker open information are
connected to the BSTGGIO inputs 6 and 7. This is interlocking information from
control logic. The information of detected current transformer fault is connected to
input 8.

As a consequence of sending interlocking information to remote end, also receiving of

same information locally is needed. Therefore, remote feeder ready, remote circuit
breaker open and remote current transformer failure are connected to the binary signal
transfer function outputs.

BSTGGIO1
SEND_SIG_1 RECV_SIG_1
SEND_SIG_2 RECV_SIG_2
SEND_SIG_3 RECV_SIG_3
SEND_SIG_4 RECV_SIG_4
SEND_SIG_5 RECV_SIG_5
LOCAL_FEEDER_READY SEND_SIG_6 RECV_SIG_6 REMOTE_FEEDER_READY
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS SEND_SIG_7 RECV_SIG_7 REMOTE_CB_OPEN
CCSPVC1_FAIL SEND_SIG_8 RECV_SIG_8 REMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL
SEND_SIG_A
RECV_SIG_A

GUID-E5BF4D5D-5C15-408A-B9CC-19F8B9499729 V2 EN

Figure 229: Binary signal transfer

3.7.3.4 Functional diagrams for control and interlocking

Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.
DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 and
ESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in the
standard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing switch
status information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1 respectively.

The configuration also includes closed enable interlocking logic for disconnector and
earthing switch. These signals are available for binary outputs X100:SO1 and
X100:SO2 respectively.

DCSXSWI1
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST POSOPEN OPENPOS
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS DCSXSWI1_OKPOS

AND6
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS B1 O DC1_CLOSE_ENABLED
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-FCAC88AB-7DA0-4F21-808E-C961DA3BA381 V1 EN

Figure 230: Disconnector 1 interlocking logic

162 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

ESSXSWI1
X110_BI7_ES1_OPENED POSOPEN OPENPOS ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
X110_BI8_ES1_CLOSED POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS

OR6
X110_BI1_PLUG_OUT B1 O ES1_CLOSE_ENABLED
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-9A7AC8F3-6187-4203-8D9D-BC9B9D34FA72 V1 EN

Figure 231: Earth-switch 1 control logic

The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated. The
input can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of the
disconnector or circuit breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of the trip
logics and remote feeder position indication. Master trip logic, disconnector and
earth-switch statuses are local feeder ready information to be sent for the remote end.

The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or circuit breaker
truck is either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This, together with
the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-enable signal to
the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for circuit breaker is
always enabled.

If REMOTE_FEEDER_READY information is missing, for

example, in case of protection communication not connected, it
disables the circuit breaker closing in the local IED.

Any additional signals required by the application can be connected

for opening and closing of circuit breaker.

CBXCBR1
X110_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN SELECTED CBXCBR1_SELECTED
X110_BI4_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE EXE_OP CBXCBR1_EXE_OP
TRUE ENA_OPEN EXE_CL CBXCBR1_EXE_CL
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE ENA_CLOSE OP_REQ
FALSE BLK_OPEN CL_REQ
CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE BLK_CLOSE OPENPOS CBXCBR1_OPENPOS
CBXCBR1_AU_OPEN AU_OPEN CLOSEPOS
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE AU_CLOSE OKPOS
TRIP OPEN_ENAD
SYNC_OK CLOSE_ENAD CBXCBR1_CLOSE_ENAD
SYNC_ITL_BYP

GUID-26FE1003-2AA2-42AD-8E92-6E84693FBF66 V2 EN

Figure 232: Circuit breaker 1 control logic

RED615 163
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

OR
CBXCBR1_EXE_CL B1 O CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2

GUID-1893502C-2D0A-44DF-A2BE-37057971BE78 V1 EN

Figure 233: Signals for closing coil of circuit breaker 1

OR6
CBXCBR1_EXE_OP B1 O CB_OPEN_COMMAND
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B2
DARREC1_OPEN_CB B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-AD01A758-DC66-4017-9F8A-A4321FF0BB4F V1 EN

Figure 234: Signals for opening coil of circuit breaker 1

AND6
DCSXSWI1_OKPOS B1 O LOCAL_FEEDER_READY
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS B2
CB_SPRING_CHARGED B3
B4
NOT B5
B6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP IN OUT

NOT
TRPPTRC2_TRIP IN OUT

AND6
CB_SPRING_CHARGED B1 O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
B2
B3
NOT B4
B5
TRPPTRC1_TRIP IN OUT B6

NOT
TRPPTRC2_TRIP IN OUT

AND
DCSXSWI1_OKPOS B1 O
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS B2

TCSSCBR_ALARM
GUID-8A8014C7-EF80-45C5-BDCB-81392240A562 V1 EN

Figure 235: Circuit breaker close enable logic

Connect higher-priority conditions before enabling the circuit

breaker. These conditions cannot be bypassed with bypass feature of
the function.

164 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

OR6
T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE B1 O CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE
T2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-DAFA0354-CBB5-4A1A-AE95-6C61DF47D264 V1 EN

Figure 236: Circuit breaker 1 close blocking logic

The configuration includes logic for generating circuit breaker external closing and
opening command with the IED in local or remote mode.

Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command and
modify it according to the application.

Connect the additional signals for closing and opening of the circuit
breaker in local or remote mode, if it is applicable for the application.

AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2

GUID-4C5A7939-3DB5-4E2C-8057-BC2831AC51A9 V1 EN

Figure 237: External closing command for circuit breaker 1

AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2

GUID-F8E822D5-467C-4F65-BC4C-8E224B373771 V1 EN

Figure 238: External opening command for circuit breaker 1

3.7.3.5 Functional diagrams for measurement functions

The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase current
measurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card in
the back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the sequence
current and the residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures the residual
current.

The three-phase bus side phase voltage inputs to the IED are measured by the three-
phase voltage measurement function VMMXU1. The voltage input is connected to
the X130 card in the back panel. Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 measures
the sequence voltage.

RED615 165
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

The measurements can be seen in the LHMI and they are available under the
measurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks can
generate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the measured
current values.

Frequency measurement FMMXU1 of the power system and the three-phase power
and energy measurement PEMMXU1 are available. Load profile record LDPRLRC1
is included in the measurements sheet. LDPRLRC1 offers the ability to observe the
loading history of the corresponding feeder.

CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM

GUID-21605B4E-39E0-4B01-AAA8-F9837624B897 V1 EN

Figure 239: Current measurement: Three-phase current measurement

CSMSQI1

GUID-B12A010D-5651-40C2-84E6-DE98FB2446FC V1 EN

Figure 240: Current measurement: Sequence current measurement

RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN

GUID-D40B9D8C-2274-4C05-A80A-720413B2D9AA V1 EN

Figure 241: Current measurement: Residual current measurement

VMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM

GUID-32CBD962-FA4F-4773-8AE8-4CA75080EF3A V1 EN

Figure 242: Voltage measurement: Three-phase voltage measurement

VSMSQI1

GUID-C4C01605-D449-4A1C-8B7F-5445D42529B4 V1 EN

Figure 243: Voltage measurement: Sequence voltage measurement

FMMXU1

GUID-491E5D77-77E0-4BCD-A9AB-CAB90BB34C3D V1 EN

Figure 244: Other measurement: Frequency measurement

166 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

PEMMXU1
RSTACM

GUID-DFAF0FB2-4B5B-41D4-B32F-C6524E78E15A V1 EN

Figure 245: Other measurement: Three-phase power and energy measurement

FLTRFRC1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD

GUID-E66A78DE-D1C4-452F-9AB7-2792070EFB23 V2 EN

Figure 246: Other measurement: Data monitoring

LDPRLRC1
RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM

GUID-119EC22D-0241-4FAF-B5D9-9AEC58F98ECC V2 EN

Figure 247: Other measurement: Load profile record

The power quality functions CMHAI1 and VMHAI1 can be used to measure the
harmonic contents of the phase current and phase voltages. The voltage variation, that
is, sage and swells can be measured by the voltage variation function PHQVVR1. By
default, these power quality functions are not included in the configuration.
Depending on the application, the required logic connections can be made by
PCM600.

3.7.3.6 Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs

X110_BI1_PLUG_OUT
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 1

X110_BI2_CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2

X110_BI3_CB_OPENED
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3

X110_BI4_CB_CLOSED
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4

X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5

X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6

X110_BI7_ES1_OPENED
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7

X110_BI8_ES1_CLOSED
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8
GUID-B790F48B-CE29-4B6F-9F1E-8999A1305540 V1 EN

Figure 248: Default binary inputs - X110

RED615 167
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

CBXCBR1_CLOSE_ENAD
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1

CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2

DC1_CLOSE_ENABLED
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1

ES1_CLOSE_ENABLED
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2

CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3

CCBRBRF1_TRRET
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
GUID-6D07D6AC-B66C-4352-8580-1333FA32EAFD V1 EN

Figure 249: Default binary outputs - X100

168 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

LED1
OK
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE ALARM
RESET

LED2
OR6
OK
NSPTOC_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B2 RESET
DPHxPDOC_OPERATE B3
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B4
B5
B6

LED3
OR6
OK
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B2 RESET
EFPADM_OPERATE B3
WPWDE_OPERATE B4
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B5
B6

LED4
OK
LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE ALARM
RESET

LED5
OK
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE ALARM
RESET

GUID-AAE166F5-E7EA-4F5C-AD82-A86D094C9007 V2 EN

LED6
OR
OK
T1PTTR1_ALARM B1 O ALARM
T2PTTR1_ALARM B2 RESET

LED7
OK
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE ALARM
RESET

LED8
OK
PCSITPC1_ALARM ALARM
RESET

LED9
OR6
OK
TCSSCBR_ALARM B1 O ALARM
CCSPVC1_ALARM B2 RESET
B3
B4
B5
B6

LED10
OK
SSCBR1_ALARMS ALARM
RESET

GUID-401B69BF-1917-4EE7-A132-A1322C92B1B0 V2 EN

Figure 250: Default LED connection

RED615 169
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756498 M
RED615 standard configurations

3.7.3.7 Other functions

The configuration includes few instances of multipurpose protection MAPGAPC,

fault locator, harmonics-based earth-fault protection, runtime counter for machines
and devices MDSOPT and few instances of different types of timers and control
functions. These functions are not included in application configuration but they can
be added based on the system requirements.

170 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 4
Requirements for measurement transformers

Section 4 Requirements for measurement

transformers

4.1 Current transformers

4.1.1 Current transformer requirements for non-directional

overcurrent protection
For reliable and correct operation of the overcurrent protection, the CT has to be
chosen carefully. The distortion of the secondary current of a saturated CT may
endanger the operation, selectivity, and co-ordination of protection. However, when
the CT is correctly selected, a fast and reliable short circuit protection can be enabled.

The selection of a CT depends not only on the CT specifications but also on the
network fault current magnitude, desired protection objectives, and the actual CT
burden. The protection settings of the protection relay should be defined in accordance
with the CT performance as well as other factors.

4.1.1.1 Current transformer accuracy class and accuracy limit factor

The rated accuracy limit factor (Fn) is the ratio of the rated accuracy limit primary
current to the rated primary current. For example, a protective current transformer of
type 5P10 has the accuracy class 5P and the accuracy limit factor 10. For protective
current transformers, the accuracy class is designed by the highest permissible
percentage composite error at the rated accuracy limit primary current prescribed for
the accuracy class concerned, followed by the letter "P" (meaning protection).
Table 36: Limits of errors according to IEC 60044-1 for protective current transformers
Accuracy class Current error at Phase displacement at rated primary Composite error at
rated primary current rated accuracy limit
current (%) minutes centiradians primary current (%)
5P 1 60 1.8 5
10P 3 - - 10

The accuracy classes 5P and 10P are both suitable for non-directional overcurrent
protection. The 5P class provides a better accuracy. This should be noted also if there
are accuracy requirements for the metering functions (current metering, power
metering, and so on) of the protection relay.

The CT accuracy primary limit current describes the highest fault current magnitude
at which the CT fulfils the specified accuracy. Beyond this level, the secondary current

RED615 171
Application Manual
Section 4 1MRS756498 M
Requirements for measurement transformers

of the CT is distorted and it might have severe effects on the performance of the
protection relay.

In practise, the actual accuracy limit factor (Fa) differs from the rated accuracy limit
factor (Fn) and is proportional to the ratio of the rated CT burden and the actual CT
burden.

The actual accuracy limit factor is calculated using the formula:

Sin + Sn
Fa Fn
Sin + S
A071141 V1 EN

Fn the accuracy limit factor with the nominal external burden Sn

Sin the internal secondary burden of the CT

S the actual external burden

4.1.1.2 Non-directional overcurrent protection

The current transformer selection

Non-directional overcurrent protection does not set high requirements on the accuracy
class or on the actual accuracy limit factor (Fa) of the CTs. It is, however,
recommended to select a CT with Fa of at least 20.

The nominal primary current I1n should be chosen in such a way that the thermal and
dynamic strength of the current measuring input of the protection relay is not
exceeded. This is always fulfilled when

I1n > Ikmax / 100,

Ikmax is the highest fault current.

The saturation of the CT protects the measuring circuit and the current input of the
protection relay. For that reason, in practice, even a few times smaller nominal
primary current can be used than given by the formula.

Recommended start current settings

If Ikmin is the lowest primary current at which the highest set overcurrent stage is to
operate, the start current should be set using the formula:

Current start value < 0.7 (Ikmin / I1n)

I1n is the nominal primary current of the CT.

The factor 0.7 takes into account the protection relay inaccuracy, current transformer
errors, and imperfections of the short circuit calculations.

172 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 4
Requirements for measurement transformers

The adequate performance of the CT should be checked when the setting of the high
set stage overcurrent protection is defined. The operate time delay caused by the CT
saturation is typically small enough when the overcurrent setting is noticeably lower
than Fa.

When defining the setting values for the low set stages, the saturation of the CT does
not need to be taken into account and the start current setting is simply according to the
formula.

Delay in operation caused by saturation of current transformers

The saturation of CT may cause a delayed protection relay operation. To ensure the
time selectivity, the delay must be taken into account when setting the operate times
of successive protection relays.

With definite time mode of operation, the saturation of CT may cause a delay that is
as long as the time the constant of the DC component of the fault current, when the
current is only slightly higher than the starting current. This depends on the accuracy
limit factor of the CT, on the remanence flux of the core of the CT, and on the operate
time setting.

With inverse time mode of operation, the delay should always be considered as being
as long as the time constant of the DC component.

With inverse time mode of operation and when the high-set stages are not used, the AC
component of the fault current should not saturate the CT less than 20 times the
starting current. Otherwise, the inverse operation time can be further prolonged.
Therefore, the accuracy limit factor Fa should be chosen using the formula:

Fa > 20 Current start value / I1n

The Current start value is the primary start current setting of the protection relay.

4.1.1.3 Example for non-directional overcurrent protection

The following figure describes a typical medium voltage feeder. The protection is
implemented as three-stage definite time non-directional overcurrent protection.

RED615 173
Application Manual
Section 4 1MRS756498 M
Requirements for measurement transformers

A071142 V1 EN

Figure 251: Example of three-stage overcurrent protection

The maximum three-phase fault current is 41.7 kA and the minimum three-phase short
circuit current is 22.8 kA. The actual accuracy limit factor of the CT is calculated to
be 59.

The start current setting for low-set stage (3I>) is selected to be about twice the
nominal current of the cable. The operate time is selected so that it is selective with the
next protection relay (not visible in Figure 251). The settings for the high-set stage and
instantaneous stage are defined also so that grading is ensured with the downstream
protection. In addition, the start current settings have to be defined so that the
protection relay operates with the minimum fault current and it does not operate with
the maximum load current. The settings for all three stages are as in Figure 251.

For the application point of view, the suitable setting for instantaneous stage (I>>>) in
this example is 3 500 A (5.83 I2n). For the CT characteristics point of view, the
criteria given by the current transformer selection formula is fulfilled and also the
protection relay setting is considerably below the Fa. In this application, the CT rated
burden could have been selected much lower than 10 VA for economical reasons.

174 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 5
IED physical connections

Section 5 IED physical connections

5.1 Inputs

5.1.1 Energizing inputs

5.1.1.1 Phase currents

The IED can also be used in single or two-phase applications by

leaving one or two energizing inputs unoccupied. However, at least
terminals X120:7-8 must be connected.

Table 37: Phase current inputs included in configurations A, B, C and D

Terminal Description
X120:7-8 IL1
X120:9-10 IL2
X120:11-12 IL3

5.1.1.2 Residual current

Table 38: Residual current input included in configurations A, B, C and D
Terminal Description
X120:13-14 Io

Table 39: Residual current input included in configuration E

Terminal Description
X130:1-2 Io

5.1.1.3 Phase voltages

Table 40: Phase voltage inputs included in configuration D
Terminal Description
X130:11-12 U1
X130:13-14 U2
X130:15-16 U3

RED615 175
Application Manual
Section 5 1MRS756498 M
IED physical connections

5.1.1.4 Residual voltage

Table 41: Additional residual voltage input included in configuration B
Terminal Description
X120:5-6 Uo

Table 42: Additional residual voltage input included in configuration D

Terminal Description
X130:17-18 Uo

5.1.1.5 Sensor inputs

Table 43: Combi sensor inputs included in configuration E
Terminal Description
X131 IL1
U1
X132 IL2
U2
X133 IL3
U3

5.1.2 Auxiliary supply voltage input

The auxiliary voltage of the protection relay is connected to terminals X100:1-2. At
DC supply, the positive lead is connected to terminal X100:1. The permitted auxiliary
voltage range (AC/DC or DC) is marked on the top of the LHMI of the protection
relay.
Table 44: Auxiliary voltage supply
Terminal Description
X100:1 + Input
X100:2 - Input

5.1.3 Binary inputs

The binary inputs can be used, for example, to generate a blocking signal, to unlatch
output contacts, to trigger the disturbance recorder or for remote control of IED
settings.

176 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 5
IED physical connections

Table 45: Binary input terminals X110:1-13 with BIO0005 module

Terminal Description
X110:1 BI1, +
X110:2 BI1, -
X110:3 BI2, +
X110:4 BI2, -
X110:5 BI3, +
X110:6 BI3, -
X110:6 BI4, -
X110:7 BI4, +
X110:8 BI5, +
X110:9 BI5, -
X110:9 BI6, -
X110:10 BI6, +
X110:11 BI7, +
X110:12 BI7, -
X110:12 BI8, -
X110:13 BI8, +

Binary inputs of slot X120 are available with configurations A, C and D.

Table 46: Binary input terminals X120-1...6
Terminal Description
X120:1 BI1, +
X120:2 BI1, -
X120:3 BI2, +
X120:2 BI2, -
X120:4 BI3, +
X120:2 BI3, -
X120:5 BI4, +
X120:6 BI4, -

Binary inputs of slot X120 are available with configuration B.

Table 47: Binary input terminals X120:1-4
Terminal Description
X120:1 BI1, +
X120:2 BI1, -
X120:3 BI2, +
X120:2 BI2, -
X120:4 BI3, +
X120:2 BI3, -

RED615 177
Application Manual
Section 5 1MRS756498 M
IED physical connections

Binary inputs of slot X130 are optional for configurations A, B and C.

Table 48: Binary input terminals X130:1-9
Terminal Description
X130:1 BI1, +
X130:2 BI1, -
X130:2 BI2, -
X130:3 BI2, +
X130:4 BI3, +
X130:5 BI3, -
X130:5 BI4, -
X130:6 BI4, +
X130:7 BI5, +
X130:8 BI5, -
X130:8 BI6, -
X130:9 BI6, +

Optional binary inputs of slot X130 are available with configuration D.

Table 49: Optional binary input terminals X130:1-8 with AIM0006
Terminal Description
X130:1 BI1, +
X130:2 BI1, -
X130:3 BI2, +
X130:4 BI2, -
X130:5 BI3, +
X130:6 BI3, -
X130:7 BI4, +
X130:8 BI4, -

5.1.4 RTD/mA inputs

It is possible to connect mA and RTD based measurement sensors to the IED if the
IED is provided with optional with AIM0003 module in standard configuration D.
Table 50: Optional RTD/mA inputs with AIM0003 module
Terminal Description
X130:1 mA 1 (AI1), +
X130:2 mA 1 (AI1), -
X130:3 RTD1 (AI2), +
X130:4 RTD1 (AI2), -
X130:5 RTD1 (AI2), ground
Table continues on next page

178 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 5
IED physical connections

Terminal Description
X130:6 RTD2 (AI3), +
X130:7 RTD2 (AI3), -
X130:8 RTD2 (AI3), ground

5.2 Outputs

5.2.1 Outputs for tripping and controlling

Output contacts PO1, PO2, PO3 and PO4 are heavy-duty trip contacts capable of
controlling most circuit breakers. On delivery from the factory, the trip signals from
all the protection stages are routed to PO3 and PO4.
Table 51: Output contacts
Terminal Description
X100:6 PO1, NO
X100:7 PO1, NO
X100:8 PO2, NO
X100:9 PO2, NO
X100:15 PO3, NO (TCS resistor)
X100:16 PO3, NO
X100:17 PO3, NO
X100:18 PO3 (TCS1 input), NO
X100:19 PO3 (TCS1 input), NO
X100:20 PO4, NO (TCS resistor)
X100:21 PO4, NO
X100:22 PO4, NO
X100:23 PO4 (TCS2 input), NO
X100:24 PO4 (TCS2 input), NO

5.2.2 Outputs for signalling

SO output contacts can be used for signalling on start and tripping of the IED. On
delivery from the factory, the start and alarm signals from all the protection stages are
routed to signalling outputs.

RED615 179
Application Manual
Section 5 1MRS756498 M
IED physical connections

Table 52: Output contacts X100:10-14

Terminal Description
X100:10 SO1, common
X100:11 SO1, NC
X100:12 SO1, NO
X100:13 SO2, NO
X100:14 SO2, NO

Table 53: Output contacts X110:14-24 with BIO0005

Terminal Description
X110:14 SO1, common
X110:15 SO1, NO
X110:16 SO1, NC
X110:17 SO2, common
X110:18 SO2, NO
X110:19 SO2, NC
X110:20 SO3, common
X110:21 SO3, NO
X110:22 SO3, NC
X110:23 SO4, common
X110:24 SO4, NO

Output contacts of slot X130 are available in the optional BIO0006 module with
configurations A, B and C.
Table 54: Output contacts X130:10-18
Terminal Description
X130:10 SO1, common
X130:11 SO1, NO
X130:12 SO1, NC
X130:13 SO2, common
X130:14 SO2, NO
X130:15 SO2, NC
X130:16 SO3, common
X130:17 SO3, NO
X130:18 SO3, NC

180 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 5
IED physical connections

5.2.3 IRF
The IRF contact functions as an output contact for the self-supervision system of the
protection relay. Under normal operating conditions, the protection relay is energized
and the contact is closed (X100:3-5). When a fault is detected by the self-supervision
system or the auxiliary voltage is disconnected, the output contact drops off and the
contact closes (X100:3-4).
Table 55: IRF contact
Terminal Description
X100:3 IRF, common
X100:4 Closed; IRF, or Uaux disconnected

X100:5 Closed; no IRF, and Uaux connected

5.3 Protection communication options

Two different protection communication options are available for the IED, that is, a
fiber optic link and a galvanic pilot wire link.

Multi-mode or single-mode glass fiber can be used in a fiber optic link. Select the
required glass fiber mode when ordering the IED. Link lengths up to 2 km with multi-
mode fiber and link lengths up to 20 km with single-mode fiber can be achieved. The
fiber optic cable used for protection communication is connected to the X16/LD
connector in the IED. See the technical manual for more information.

If a galvanic pilot wire is used as a protection communication link, the pilot wire
modem RPW600 is required. Select the pilot wire option when ordering the IED. The
protection communication link always requires two modems in a protection scheme,
thus delivered in pairs of master (RPW600M) and follower (RPW600F) units. The
IED is connected to the pilot wire modem using a single-mode fiber optic cable. Thus
a single-mode version of IED is required if the pilot wire link is used. The fiber optic
cable is connected to the X16/LD connector in the IED and in Ethernet FX connector
in the pilot wire modem.

Setting or configuration is not needed with either of the pilot wire modem variants or
with the IED. Pilot wire link lengths up to 8 km with 0.8 mm2 twisted pair cables can
be applied. Even higher distances can be achieved with good quality twisted pair
cables in the pilot wire link. The achieved link length also depends on the noise levels
in the installations.

The pilot wire modem has QoS (quality of service) LEDs in the front panel for easy
diagnostics of the pilot wire link quality. The diagnostics feature does not depend on
the payload over the pilot wire link and can be used for checking the quality of the
intended pilot wire link even without installing the IEDs. In addition, a diagnostic kit
is available as an ordering option for more advanced diagnostic and logging of
diagnostic parameters of the pilot wire link. The kit consists of a CD-ROM with the

RED615 181
Application Manual
Section 5 1MRS756498 M
IED physical connections

RPW600 Diagnostic Tool software with a built-in help, required drivers and a special
serial diagnostic cable to be connected to the console port of the modem.

Fibre optic link

MM or SM fiber optic

RED615 RED615

Galvanic pilot wire link

SM fibre optic SM fibre optic

3m Galvanic pilot wire twisted-pair 3m

RPW600F
RPW600M pilot wire modem
pilot wire modem master follower
RED615 RED615
GUID-D4D15565-FD47-425D-8ABE-EA1A3C455673 V1 EN

Figure 252: Protection communication options

See RPW600 user guide for more information.

182 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 6
Glossary

Section 6 Glossary

615 series Series of numerical protection and control relays for

protection and supervision applications of utility
substations, and industrial switchgear and equipment
AI Analog input
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
BI Binary input
BIO Binary input and output
BO Binary output
CB Circuit breaker
CT Current transformer
DAN Doubly attached node
DC 1. Direct current
2. Disconnector
3. Double command
DNP3 A distributed network protocol originally developed by
Westronic. The DNP3 Users Group has the ownership
of the protocol and assumes responsibility for its
evolution.
DPC Double-point control
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
Ethernet A standard for connecting a family of frame-based
computer networking technologies into a LAN
FIFO First in, first out
FTP File transfer protocol
FTPS FTP Secure
GOOSE Generic Object-Oriented Substation Event
GPS Global Positioning System
HMI Human-machine interface
HSR High-availability seamless redundancy
HTTPS Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure
I/O Input/output
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

RED615 183
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRS756498 M
Glossary

IEC 60870-5-103 1. Communication standard for protective equipment

2. A serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point
communication
IEC 61850 International standard for substation communication
and modeling
IEC 61850-8-1 A communication protocol based on the IEC 61850
standard series
IEC 61850-9-2 A communication protocol based on the IEC 61850
standard series
IEC 61850-9-2 LE Lite Edition of IEC 61850-9-2 offering process bus
interface
IED Intelligent electronic device (protection and control
relay)
IEEE 1588 v2 Standard for a Precision Clock Synchronization
Protocol for networked measurement and control
systems
IEEE 1686 Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices'
(IEDs') Cyber Security Capabilities
IP address A set of four numbers between 0 and 255, separated by
periods. Each server connected to the Internet is
assigned a unique IP address that specifies the location
for the TCP/IP protocol.
IRIG-B Inter-Range Instrumentation Group's time code format
B
LAN Local area network
LC Connector type for glass fiber cable, IEC 61754-20
LCD Liquid crystal display
LE Light Edition
LED Light-emitting diode
LHMI Local human-machine interface
MAC Media access control
MCB Miniature circuit breaker
MMS 1. Manufacturing message specification
2. Metering management system
Modbus A serial communication protocol developed by the
Modicon company in 1979. Originally used for
communication in PLCs and RTU devices.
Modbus TCP/IP Modbus RTU protocol which uses TCP/IP and Ethernet
to carry data between devices

184 RED615
Application Manual
1MRS756498 M Section 6
Glossary

NC Normally closed
NO Normally open
PCM600 Protection and Control IED Manager
PO Power output
PRP Parallel redundancy protocol
PTP Precision Time Protocol
RIO600 Remote I/O unit
RJ-45 Galvanic connector type
RS-232 Serial interface standard
RS-485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RSTP Rapid spanning tree protocol
RTD Resistance temperature detector
RTU Remote terminal unit
SAN Single attached node
SLD Single-line diagram
SMV Sampled measured values
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol
SO Signal output
Single-line diagram Simplified notation for representing a three-phase
power system. Instead of representing each of three
phases with a separate line or terminal, only one
conductor is represented.
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TCS Trip-circuit supervision
VT Voltage transformer
WAN Wide area network
WHMI Web human-machine interface

RED615 185
Application Manual
186
187
Contact us

1MRS756498 M Copyright 2016 ABB. All rights reserved.

ABB Oy
Medium Voltage Products,
Distribution Automation
P.O. Box 699
FI-65101 VAASA, Finland
Phone +358 10 22 11
Fax +358 10 22 41094

www.abb.com/mediumvoltage

www.abb.com/substationautomation

ABB India Limited,

Distribution Automation
Maneja Works
Vadodara-390013, India
Phone +91 265 6724402
Fax +91 265 6724423

www.abb.com/mediumvoltage

www.abb.com/substationautomation